Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 1084

Large Format Printer

User Manual
Basic Printing Workflow 1 1
Working With Various Print Jobs 16 2
Enhanced Printing Options 39 3

Windows Software 184 4


Mac OS X Software 447 5

Print Jobs 667 6


Handling Paper 718 7
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 783 8
Printer Parts 825 9
Network Setting 886 10

Maintenance 919 11
Troubleshooting 975 12
Error Message 1013 13

Appendix 1043 14

ver1.20 2010-07-26 ENG


Note
In order to be printed easily, this PDF-format manual is converted from the HTML-format instruction manual included
on the "User Manuals CD-ROM" supplied with the printer. Thus, there are descriptions that are applied only in HTML
format, and functions (video display function, etc.) that cannot be used. We appreciate your understanding.
Co n te n ts

Basic Printing Workflow 1


Printing procedure 2
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets ................................................................................................................... 2
Loading and Printing on Rolls ................................................................................................................................... 3
Loading and Printing on Sheets ................................................................................................................................. 6
Printing in Windows .................................................................................................................................................. 8
Printing from Mac OS X ............................................................................................................................................ 9

Canceling print jobs 11


Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel .......................................................................................................... 11
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows ....................................................................................................................... 12
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X ..................................................................................................................... 13

Pausing Printing 15
Pausing Printing ....................................................................................................................................................... 15

Working With Various Print Jobs 16


Printing Photos and Images 17
Printing Photos and Images ..................................................................................................................................... 17
Printing Photos and Images (Windows) ............................................................................................................... 18
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ............................................................................................................. 20
Printing from Photoshop .......................................................................................................................................... 24
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows) ............................................................................................................. 25
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) ........................................................................................................... 28

Printing Office Documents 33


Printing Office Documents ...................................................................................................................................... 33
Printing Office Documents (Windows) ................................................................................................................ 34
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X) .............................................................................................................. 35

Enhanced Printing Options 39


Adjusting Images 40
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ................................................................................................................ 40
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) ........................................................................................ 43
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ...................................................................................... 46
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ................................................................. 49
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) .................................................................... 51
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) .................................................................. 54

Choosing Paper for Printing 57


Choosing a Paper for Printing .................................................................................................................................. 57
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ..................................................................................................................... 57

Printing enlargements or reductions 58


Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size ............................................................................................................ 58
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ...................................................................................... 58
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) .................................................................................... 60
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ................................................................................................................. 64
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ........................................................................................... 64
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) ......................................................................................... 66
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value ..................................................................................................... 69
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) ............................................................................... 70
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) ............................................................................. 72

Printing at full size 77


Printing on Oversized Paper .................................................................................................................................... 77
Printing at Full Size (Windows) ........................................................................................................................... 78
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) ......................................................................................................................... 79
Borderless Printing at Actual Size ........................................................................................................................... 83
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) ..................................................................................................... 84
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) ................................................................................................... 86

Borderless Printing 90
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size ..................................................................................................... 90
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ................................................. 91
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) ............................................... 93
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ............................................................................ 97
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ...................................................... 98
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) .................................................. 100

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes 104


Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) ........................................................................ 104
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) ................................................... 105
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) .................................................. 109
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes .................................................................................................................. 113
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) ............................................................................................ 113
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) .......................................................................................... 117

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 121


Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .................................................................................................... 121
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) ............................................................................. 122
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) ............................................................................ 124
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously ................................................................................................................... 126
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) ............................................................................................ 126
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) ........................................................................................... 128
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ......................................................................................................................... 131
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) ................................................................................................... 131
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) ................................................................................................. 134
Printing Posters in Sections ................................................................................................................................... 138
Printing Large Posters (Windows) ..................................................................................................................... 139

Centering originals 142


Printing Originals Centered on Rolls ..................................................................................................................... 142
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) .............................................................................................. 142
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) ............................................................................................. 144
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ................................................................................................................... 148
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) ............................................................................................ 148
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) ........................................................................................... 150

Conserving roll paper 154


Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees .................................................................................... 154
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) .............................................................. 154
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) ............................................................ 156
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins ................................................ 159
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) .......................... 159
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) ........................ 161

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals 165


Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals .............................................................................................................. 165

Checking Images Before Printing 168


Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ............................................................................................... 168
Other useful settings 170
Printing With Watermarks ..................................................................................................................................... 170
Printing with Watermarks— COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) ........................................................ 171
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation ............................................................................. 173
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) ....................................................... 174
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) ..................................................... 175
Using Favorites ...................................................................................................................................................... 179
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing .......................................................................................................................... 179
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) .................................................................................................... 179
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) .................................................................................................. 181

Windows Software 184


Printer Driver 185
Printer Driver Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 185
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver .................................................................................................................. 187
Confirming Print Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 189
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing .............................................................................................. 190
Using Favorites ..................................................................................................................................................... 191
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications ............................................................................... 193
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu ...................................................... 195
Main Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................ 197
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 200
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 201
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application .................................................................................... 202
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color ......................................................................................................................... 202
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color ................................................................................................................ 204
Matching Sheet .................................................................................................................................................. 205
Ambient Light Adjust dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 207
Light Source Check Tool ................................................................................................................................... 209
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome ............................................................................................................. 210
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome .................................................................................................... 211
Gray Adjustment Sheet ..................................................................................................................................... 212
Page Setup Sheet ................................................................................................................................................... 213
Output Method dialog box ................................................................................................................................. 216
Paper Size Options Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................... 217
Layout Sheet ......................................................................................................................................................... 218
Page Options Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................. 220
Special Settings Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................. 221
Favorites Sheet ...................................................................................................................................................... 222
Utility Sheet .......................................................................................................................................................... 224
Support Sheet ........................................................................................................................................................ 225
Settings Summaries Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 226
Device Settings Sheet ........................................................................................................................................... 226

Preview 228
The Features of Preview ........................................................................................................................................ 228
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 228
Starting Preview ..................................................................................................................................................... 228
Preview Main Window .......................................................................................................................................... 230
Dialog Area ............................................................................................................................................................ 233
Enlarge/Reduce the screen display ........................................................................................................................ 234
Moving a Page ....................................................................................................................................................... 234
Using the ruler ....................................................................................................................................................... 235
Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees .................................................................................................................. 235
Printing with Selecting the Layout ........................................................................................................................ 237
Print on the Center ................................................................................................................................................. 239
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ...................................................................................................................... 240
Free Layout 241
The Features of Free Layout .................................................................................................................................. 241
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 242
Starting Free Layout .............................................................................................................................................. 242
Free Layout Main Window .................................................................................................................................... 244
Detailed Settings .................................................................................................................................................... 246
Preferences Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................... 247
Page Options Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................... 248
Zoom Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................................. 249
Format Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................................ 250
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page .............................................................................................. 252
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page ........................................... 254
Selecting an Object ................................................................................................................................................ 257
Changing the Object Size ...................................................................................................................................... 258
Moving an Object .................................................................................................................................................. 259
Rotating an Object ................................................................................................................................................. 259
Laying out Objects Automatically ......................................................................................................................... 260
Aligning Objects .................................................................................................................................................... 260
Changing the Object Overlapping Order ............................................................................................................... 263
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ............................................................................................................................. 264
Folded Duplex Window ......................................................................................................................................... 265
Finished Size Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 266
Binding Settings Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................. 267
Prints using Folded Duplex ................................................................................................................................... 268

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 269


The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .................................................................................. 269
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 269
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .............................................................................................. 269
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 271
Hot Folder .............................................................................................................................................................. 272
Creating a New Hot Folder .................................................................................................................................... 273
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder .......................................................................................... 277
Setting the Print Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 280
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER ........................................................ 281

Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional 283


The Features of Print Plug-In ................................................................................................................................ 284
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 284
Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................................... 285
Uninstall Procedures .............................................................................................................................................. 287
Starting from Photoshop ........................................................................................................................................ 288
Starting from Digital Photo Professional ............................................................................................................... 289
Print Plug-In Main Window .................................................................................................................................. 290
Preview Area ................................................................................................................................................... 292
Main Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................. 293
Page Setup Sheet .................................................................................................................................................... 297
Color Settings Sheet .............................................................................................................................................. 299
Print History Sheet ................................................................................................................................................. 301
Support Sheet ......................................................................................................................................................... 302
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................... 303
Set Configuration Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................... 305
ICC Conversion Options dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 306
Roll Paper Options Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................. 307
Size Options Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................... 308
Curves Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................................ 309
Print History Details Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................... 310
Utilize Three Types of Previews ........................................................................................................................... 311
Check Image with Print Area Layout ............................................................................................................. 312
Check the original image with Image ............................................................................................................. 313
Check Image with Roll Paper Preview ........................................................................................................... 313
Print with a Desired Picture Quality ...................................................................................................................... 314
Adjust the Colors and Print .................................................................................................................................... 315
Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Color) ............................................................................ 315
Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Monochrome) ............................................................... 317
Adjust the Colors by Color Matching ............................................................................................................. 319
Print High-Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images ................................................................................................. 320
Prints monochrome photographs with high quality ........................................................................................ 322
Using Adobe CMM ......................................................................................................................................... 322
Perform Black Point Compensation ...................................................................................................................... 324
Perform Printing Press Simulation Print ................................................................................................................ 325
Enlarge/Reduce and Print ...................................................................................................................................... 326
Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size ................................................................................ 326
Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Width of Roll Paper .............................................................................. 327
Specify Scaling, Enlarge/Reduce and Print .................................................................................................... 329
Print with No Borders ............................................................................................................................................ 330
Customize Media Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 331
Utilize Print History ............................................................................................................................................... 331
Confirm Print History Details ......................................................................................................................... 332
Apply Print History to an Image ..................................................................................................................... 333
Store Print History to Print Preferences .......................................................................................................... 333
Delete Print History ........................................................................................................................................ 336
Export Print History from Print Preferences ................................................................................................... 338
Import Print History to Print Preferences ....................................................................................................... 339
Delete Print History from Print Preferences ................................................................................................... 341
Set Information to Print with Image ............................................................................................................... 343

Print Plug-In for Office 345


Print Plug-In for Office features ............................................................................................................................ 345
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 345
Steps to install ........................................................................................................................................................ 346
Steps to uninstall .................................................................................................................................................... 349
When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed ..................................................................................................... 350
To start from Microsoft Word ............................................................................................................................... 353
Print Matching Roll Width (Word) ........................................................................................................................ 355
Borderless Printing (Word) .................................................................................................................................... 357
Multi-Page Printing (Word) ................................................................................................................................... 360
Register the settings(Word) ................................................................................................................................... 362
Print Using Registered Settings (Word) ................................................................................................................ 363
Portrait Orientation / Landscape Orientation (Word) ............................................................................................ 365
To start from Microsoft PowerPoint ...................................................................................................................... 367
Print Matching Roll Width (PowerPoint) .............................................................................................................. 369
Borderless Printing (PowerPoint) .......................................................................................................................... 371
Multi-Page Printing (PowerPoint) ......................................................................................................................... 374
Register the settings(PowerPoint) .......................................................................................................................... 376
Print Using Registered Settings (PowerPoint) ....................................................................................................... 377
Portrait Orientation / Landscape Orientation (PowerPoint) .................................................................................. 379
To start from Microsoft Excel ............................................................................................................................... 381
Print Entire Sheet (Excel) ...................................................................................................................................... 382
Print Selected Area (Excel) ................................................................................................................................... 386
Configuring Binding (Excel) ................................................................................................................................. 389
Configuring Special Settings ................................................................................................................................. 390

Status Monitor 392


The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ................................................................................................ 392
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ................................................................................... 393

Accounting 395
Accounting Manager ............................................................................................................................................. 395
Launching the Accounting Manager ..................................................................................................................... 395
Accounting Manager Main Window ..................................................................................................................... 396
Accounting Manager Basic Procedures ................................................................................................................. 398
Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager ................................................................................................... 399
Setting the Unit Cost for Ink .............................................................................................................................. 399
Setting the Unit Cost for Paper ........................................................................................................................... 401
Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper ................................................................................ 402
Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager ......................................................................... 403
Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals .............................................................................. 404
Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition ....................................................................................................... 404
Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs ..................................................... 404
Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File ................................................................................................................ 405
Showing Job Properties ......................................................................................................................................... 405
Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data ....................................................................................... 405
Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed ...................................................................................... 406

Digital Photo Front-Access 407


Digital Photo Front-Access .................................................................................................................................... 407

Device Setup Utility 408


imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ................................................................................................................. 408
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ................................................................................................. 408
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .......................................................... 408

Media Configuration Tool 412


The Features of Media Configuration Tool ........................................................................................................... 412
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 413
Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................................... 413
Starting the Media Configuration Tool .................................................................................................................. 416
Media Configuration Tool Main Window ............................................................................................................. 417
Editing Media Type Information ........................................................................................................................... 418
Adding Media Types .......................................................................................................................................... 418
Changing Media Names ..................................................................................................................................... 421
Deleting Media Types You Have Added ........................................................................................................... 423
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide ..................................................................................................... 424
Changing the Display Order of Media Types .................................................................................................... 426
Updating Media Types .......................................................................................................................................... 427
Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper/Feed Confirmed Paper .......................................................................... 430
Compatible Paper ............................................................................................................................................... 431
Add Custom Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 431
Delete Custom Paper .......................................................................................................................................... 440
Edit Custom Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 441
Export Custom Media Information .................................................................................................................... 442
Import Custom Media Information .................................................................................................................... 443
Warnings ............................................................................................................................................................ 445

Mac OS X Software 447


Printer Driver 448
Printer Driver Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 448
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver .................................................................................................................. 450
Confirming Print Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 452
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing .............................................................................................. 453
Using Favorites ..................................................................................................................................................... 454
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications ............................................................................... 454
Main Pane ............................................................................................................................................................. 455
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 459
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 460
View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application .................................................................................... 461
Matching pane .................................................................................................................................................... 462
Ambient Light Adjust dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 465
Light Source Check Tool ................................................................................................................................... 467
Color Settings Pane: Color ................................................................................................................................ 468
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color ................................................................................................................ 469
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome .................................................................................................................... 470
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome .................................................................................................... 471
Gray Adjustment Pane ....................................................................................................................................... 472
Page Setup Pane .................................................................................................................................................... 473
Utility Pane ........................................................................................................................................................... 475
Additional Settings Pane ....................................................................................................................................... 476
Support Pane ......................................................................................................................................................... 477

Preview 478
The Features of Preview ........................................................................................................................................ 478
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 478
Starting Preview ..................................................................................................................................................... 479
Preview Main Window .......................................................................................................................................... 480
Paper Settings Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 483
Easy Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 485
Advanced Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 486
Output Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 488
Color Settings Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 490
Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................... 491
Gray Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................ 493
Matching ............................................................................................................................................................. 495
Driver Matching Mode ................................................................................................................................... 497
ICC Matching Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 498
ColorSync ....................................................................................................................................................... 499
Preferences Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................... 499
Zoom Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................................. 500
Go to Page Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................................... 500
Print with No Borders ............................................................................................................................................ 500
Print on the Center ................................................................................................................................................. 501
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ...................................................................................................................... 502
Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees .............................................................................................................................. 502
Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper ...................................................................................................... 503
Display with All ..................................................................................................................................................... 504
Display with Actual Size ....................................................................................................................................... 504
Moving a Page ....................................................................................................................................................... 505

Free Layout 506


The Features of Free Layout .................................................................................................................................. 506
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 506
Starting Free Layout .............................................................................................................................................. 507
Free Layout Main Window .................................................................................................................................... 508
Paper Settings Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 511
Easy Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 513
Advanced Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 514
Color Settings Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 516
Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................... 517
Gray Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................ 519
Matching ............................................................................................................................................................. 521
Driver Matching Mode ................................................................................................................................... 523
ICC Matching Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 524
ColorSync ....................................................................................................................................................... 525
Preferences Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................... 526
Page Setup Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................................... 527
Zoom Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................................. 528
Format Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................................ 529
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page .............................................................................................. 530
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page ........................................... 530
Selecting an Object ................................................................................................................................................ 531
Changing the Object Size ...................................................................................................................................... 531
Moving an Object .................................................................................................................................................. 532
Rotating an Object ................................................................................................................................................. 533
Laying out Objects Automatically ......................................................................................................................... 533
Aligning Objects .................................................................................................................................................... 534
Changing the Object Overlapping Order ............................................................................................................... 536
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ............................................................................................................................. 538

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 539


The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .................................................................................. 539
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 539
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .............................................................................................. 540
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 541
Hot Folder .............................................................................................................................................................. 542
Creating a New Hot Folder .................................................................................................................................... 542
Editing a Hot Folder (Setting Print Conditions) .................................................................................................... 545
Deleting a Hot Folder ............................................................................................................................................ 547
Setting the Print Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 548
Paper Settings Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 548
Easy Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 550
Advanced Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 551
Output Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 553
Color Settings Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 555
Driver Matching Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 556
ICC Matching Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 557
ColorSync ........................................................................................................................................................... 558
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER ........................................................ 558

Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional 561


The Features of Print Plug-In ................................................................................................................................ 562
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 562
Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................................... 563
Uninstall Procedures .............................................................................................................................................. 565
Starting from Photoshop ........................................................................................................................................ 567
Starting from Digital Photo Professional ............................................................................................................... 568
Print Plug-In Main Window .................................................................................................................................. 569
Preview Area ................................................................................................................................................... 571
Main Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................. 573
Page Setup Sheet .................................................................................................................................................... 576
Color Settings Sheet .............................................................................................................................................. 579
Print History Sheet ................................................................................................................................................. 580
Support Sheet ......................................................................................................................................................... 581
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................... 582
Set Configuration Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................... 584
ICC Conversion Options dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 585
Roll Paper Options Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................. 586
Size Options Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................... 587
Curves Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................................ 588
Print History Details Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................... 589
Utilize Three Types of Previews ........................................................................................................................... 590
Check Image with Print Area Layout ............................................................................................................. 591
Check the original image with Image ............................................................................................................. 592
Check Image with Roll Paper Preview ........................................................................................................... 592
Print with a Desired Picture Quality ...................................................................................................................... 593
Adjust the Colors and Print .................................................................................................................................... 594
Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Color) ............................................................................ 594
Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Monochrome) ............................................................... 596
Adjust the Colors by Color Matching ............................................................................................................. 600
Print High-Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images ................................................................................................. 601
Prints monochrome photographs with high quality ........................................................................................ 603
Using Adobe CMM ......................................................................................................................................... 603
Perform Black Point Compensation ...................................................................................................................... 605
Perform Printing Press Simulation Print ................................................................................................................ 606
Enlarge/Reduce and Print ...................................................................................................................................... 607
Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size ................................................................................ 607
Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Width of Roll Paper .............................................................................. 608
Specify Scaling, Enlarge/Reduce and Print .................................................................................................... 610
Print with No Borders ............................................................................................................................................ 611
Customize Media Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 612
Utilize Print History ............................................................................................................................................... 612
Confirm Print History Details ......................................................................................................................... 613
Apply Print History to an Image ..................................................................................................................... 614
Store Print History to Print Preferences .......................................................................................................... 614
Delete Print History ........................................................................................................................................ 617
Export Print History from Print Preferences ................................................................................................... 618
Import Print History to Print Preferences ....................................................................................................... 620
Delete Print History from Print Preferences ................................................................................................... 622
Set Information to Print with Image ............................................................................................................... 623

Printmonitor 625
The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor .................................................................................................... 625
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ....................................................................................... 626

Media Configuration Tool 628


The Features of Media Configuration Tool ........................................................................................................... 628
Operating Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 629
Procedures for Installing ........................................................................................................................................ 629
Procedures for Uninstalling ................................................................................................................................... 632
Starting the Media Configuration Tool .................................................................................................................. 635
Media Configuration Tool main window .............................................................................................................. 636
Editing Media Type Information ........................................................................................................................... 637
Adding Media Types .......................................................................................................................................... 637
Changing Media Names ..................................................................................................................................... 640
Deleting Media Types You Have Added ........................................................................................................... 642
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide ..................................................................................................... 643
Changing the Display Order of Media Types .................................................................................................... 645
Updating Media Types .......................................................................................................................................... 646
Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper/Feed Confirmed Paper .......................................................................... 649
Compatible Paper ............................................................................................................................................... 650
Add Custom Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 651
Delete Custom Paper .......................................................................................................................................... 660
Edit Custom Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 661
Export Custom Media Information .................................................................................................................... 662
Import Custom Media Information .................................................................................................................... 663
Warnings ............................................................................................................................................................ 665

Print Jobs 667


Basic Print Job Operations 668
Using the Printer Hard Disk .................................................................................................................................. 668
Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk ........................................................................................................... 670
Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) ............................................................................ 673
Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold) ............................................................................... 676
Printing Saved Jobs ................................................................................................................................................ 678
Deleting Saved Jobs ............................................................................................................................................... 684
Moving Saved Jobs ................................................................................................................................................ 688

Advanced Print Job Operations 694


Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver ...................................................................... 694
Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box ............................................................................................... 695
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes ................................................................................................................... 696
Naming Personal Boxes ......................................................................................................................................... 700
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs ............................................................................................................................. 704
Printing a List of Saved Jobs ................................................................................................................................. 708
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs .......................................................................................................................... 708
Renaming Saved Jobs ............................................................................................................................................ 712

Handling Paper 718


Paper 719
Types of Paper ....................................................................................................................................................... 719
Paper Sizes ............................................................................................................................................................. 722

Handling rolls 725


Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ........................................................................................................................ 725
Loading Rolls in the Printer ................................................................................................................................... 728
Changing the Type of Paper .................................................................................................................................. 734
Specifying the Paper Length .................................................................................................................................. 736
Removing the Roll from the Printer ...................................................................................................................... 736
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls ................................................................................................................... 739
Feeding Roll Paper Manually ................................................................................................................................ 740
Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left ................................................................................................. 741
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls ............................................................................................................. 741
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls ............................................................................................................... 744
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically ........................................................................................ 748
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls ........................................................................................................................ 750

Handling sheets 751


Loading Sheets in the Printer ................................................................................................................................. 751
Printing From a Desired Starting Point ................................................................................................................. 755
Removing Sheets ................................................................................................................................................... 758

Output Stacker 760


Output Stacker ...................................................................................................................................................... 760
Using the Output Stacker ....................................................................................................................................... 761
Storing the Output Stacker ..................................................................................................................................... 767

Media take-up unit 769


Media Take-up Unit (Optional) ............................................................................................................................. 769
Using the Media Take-up Unit (Optional) ............................................................................................................. 769
Enabling Roll Take-Up .......................................................................................................................................... 770
Disabling Roll Take-Up ......................................................................................................................................... 771
Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take-up Unit ........................................................................................ 771
Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take-up Unit (Optional) ............................................................. 779

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 783


Adjustment for high-precision printing 784
Enhancing Printing Quality ................................................................................................................................... 784

Adjusting the Printhead 786


Adjusting the Printhead ......................................................................................................................................... 786
Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors (Head Posi. Adj.) ......................................................... 786
Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors (Head Posi. Adj.) ............................................................. 788
Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images (Head Height) .................................................................... 790

Adjusting the feed amount 792


Adjusting the Feed Amount ................................................................................................................................... 792
Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method (Feed Priority) .......................................................................... 792
Automatic Banding Adjustment (Adj. Quality) ................................................................................................. 793
Manual Banding Adjustment (Adj. Quality) ...................................................................................................... 795
Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount (Adj. Fine Feed) ...................................................................................... 797
Adjusting Line Length (Adjust Length) ............................................................................................................. 797
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength (VacuumStrngth) ................................................................................................ 799

Color adjustment 801


Using Color Calibration for Color Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 801
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing Environment ............................................................................ 803
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Windows) ........................................................................... 804
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Mac OS X) ......................................................................... 808
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (Windows) ............................................................. 812
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (Mac OS X) ........................................................... 815
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors ............................................................................................................. 818
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Windows) ...................................................................................... 820
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Mac OS X) ..................................................................................... 822

Printer Parts 825


Printer parts 826
Front ....................................................................................................................................................................... 826
Back ....................................................................................................................................................................... 828
Top Cover (Inside) ................................................................................................................................................. 829
Carriage .................................................................................................................................................................. 830
Ink Tank Cover (Inside) ......................................................................................................................................... 831
Stand ..................................................................................................................................................................... 832
Media Take-up Unit (Optional) ............................................................................................................................. 833

Control Panel 835


Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................... 835
Turning the Printer On and Off ............................................................................................................................. 837
Control Panel Display ............................................................................................................................................ 839
How to View Instructions With Navigate ............................................................................................................. 842
Printer Menu Operations ........................................................................................................................................ 843
Menu Operations ................................................................................................................................................... 844
Menu Structure ...................................................................................................................................................... 847
Menu Settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 854
Menu Settings (During Printing) ........................................................................................................................... 864
Status Print ............................................................................................................................................................. 866
Printing Interface Setting Reports ......................................................................................................................... 870
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations ................................................................................................. 873

Hard Disk 875


Printer Hard Disk Operations ................................................................................................................................ 875
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space ...................................................................................................................... 876
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk ................................................................................................................ 878

Optional accessories 879


Roll Holder Set ...................................................................................................................................................... 879
Media Take-up Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 879

Printer Specifications 881


Specifications ......................................................................................................................................................... 881
Print Area ............................................................................................................................................................... 884

Network Setting 886


Network Setting 887
Network Environment ........................................................................................................................................... 887
Configuring the IP Address on the Printer ............................................................................................................ 890
Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel ............................................................................ 890
Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands ........................................................................ 891
Configuring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings .............................................................................................................. 893
Using RemoteUI .................................................................................................................................................... 893
Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings .......................................................................................... 894
Specifying Printer-Related Information ............................................................................................................. 897
Configuring the Communication Mode Manually ................................................................................................ 898
Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur ............................................................................ 899
Initializing the Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 899

Network Setting (Windows) 901


Configuring the Printer Driver Destination .......................................................................................................... 901
Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings ........................................................................................... 902
Specifying the Printer's Frame Type ...................................................................................................................... 903
Specifying NetWare Print Services ....................................................................................................................... 906
Specifying NetWare Protocols .............................................................................................................................. 909
Configuring NetWare Network Settings ............................................................................................................... 910

Network Setting (Mac OS X) 912


Configuring the Printer Driver Destination .......................................................................................................... 912
Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings ......................................................................................... 912
Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks ......................................................................................... 913
Configuring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks ................................................................................................ 915
Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network ............................................................................................... 917

Maintenance 919
Ink Tanks 920
Ink Tanks ............................................................................................................................................................... 920
Replacing Ink Tanks .............................................................................................................................................. 921
Checking Ink Tank Levels ..................................................................................................................................... 932
When to Replace Ink Tanks ................................................................................................................................... 933

Printheads 934
Printhead ................................................................................................................................................................ 934
Checking for Nozzle Clogging .............................................................................................................................. 934
Cleaning the Printhead ........................................................................................................................................... 935
Replacing the Printhead ......................................................................................................................................... 936

Cutter Unit 946


Cutter Unit ............................................................................................................................................................. 946
Replacing the Cutter Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 946

Maintenance Cartridge 950


Maintenance Cartridge ........................................................................................................................................... 950
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ................................................................................................................... 950
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity ................................................................................... 959
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ........................................................................................................ 959

Cleaning the Printer 961


Cleaning the Printer Exterior ................................................................................................................................. 961
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .............................................................................................................................. 961

Other Maintenance 966


Preparing to Transfer the Printer ........................................................................................................................... 966
Updating the Firmware .......................................................................................................................................... 973
Troubleshooting 975
Frequently Asked Questions 976
Frequently Asked Questions .................................................................................................................................. 976

Problems Regarding Paper 978


Clearing Jammed Roll Paper ................................................................................................................................. 978
Clearing a Jammed Sheet ....................................................................................................................................... 982
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the paper feed slot ........................................................................................... 985
Cannot load sheets ................................................................................................................................................. 985
Paper is not cut straight .......................................................................................................................................... 985
Paper is not cut ....................................................................................................................................................... 986
The media take-up unit continues rotating ............................................................................................................ 986
The size of clear film cannot be detected .............................................................................................................. 987
Margins are wide ................................................................................................................................................... 988

Printing does not start 989


The Data Reception Lamp on the Control Panel does not light up ....................................................................... 989
The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent ........................................................................................ 989
Ink Filling.. is displayed ........................................................................................................................................ 989
The display screen indicates Agitating ................................................................................................................. 990

The printer stops during a print job 991


An error message is shown on the Display Screen ................................................................................................ 991
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper .............................................................................................................. 991

Problems with the printing quality 992


Printing is faint ...................................................................................................................................................... 992
Paper rubs against the printhead ............................................................................................................................ 993
The edges of the paper are dirty ............................................................................................................................ 993
The surface of the paper is dirty ............................................................................................................................ 994
The back side of the paper is dirty ......................................................................................................................... 994
Printed colors are inaccurate .................................................................................................................................. 995
Banding in different colors occurs ......................................................................................................................... 996
Colors in printed images are uneven ..................................................................................................................... 996
Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs ................................................................................................. 997
Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen ................................................................................................................ 998
The contrast becomes uneven during printing ..................................................................................................... 1000
The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction .................................................................... 1001
Images are printed crooked .................................................................................................................................. 1001
Documents are printed in monochrome ............................................................................................................... 1001
Line thickness is not uniform .............................................................................................................................. 1001
Lines or colors are misaligned ............................................................................................................................. 1002
Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper .......................................................................... 1003

Cannot print over a network 1004


Cannot connect the printer to the network ........................................................................................................... 1004
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network ................................................................................................................... 1004
Cannot print over a NetWare network ................................................................................................................. 1005
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks ............................................................................................. 1005

Installation problems 1006


Removing Installed Printer Drivers ..................................................................................................................... 1006

Other problems 1008


The printer does not go on ................................................................................................................................... 1008
The printer takes time to start up ......................................................................................................................... 1008
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound .................................................................................................................. 1009
Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared .............................................................. 1009
The printer consumes a lot of ink ........................................................................................................................ 1009
Ink Level Detection ............................................................................................................................................. 1009

Error Message 1013


Error Messages 1014
Messages regarding paper 1016
Paper mismatch .................................................................................................................................................... 1016
MediaType Mismatch ......................................................................................................................................... 1017
The paper is too small. ......................................................................................................................................... 1017
The paper is too small. ........................................................................................................................................ 1018
PaprWidth Mismatch ........................................................................................................................................... 1019
Paper size not detected. ....................................................................................................................................... 1019
Insufficient paper for job .................................................................................................................................... 1020
This paper cannot be used. .................................................................................................................................. 1021
Roll printing is selected. ..................................................................................................................................... 1021
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. .................................................................................................. 1022
The roll is empty. ................................................................................................................................................. 1022
No sheets. ............................................................................................................................................................ 1023
Sheet printing is selected. ................................................................................................................................... 1023
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. ................................................................................................ 1023
Paper loaded askew. ............................................................................................................................................ 1023
Cannot detect papr .............................................................................................................................................. 1024
Cannot feed paper. .............................................................................................................................................. 1025
Cannot cut paper. ................................................................................................................................................ 1025
End of paper feed. ................................................................................................................................................ 1025
Rel lever is in wrong position. ............................................................................................................................. 1026
Rewinding error. ................................................................................................................................................. 1026
Media take-up unit ready. ................................................................................................................................... 1026
Turn on the media take-up unit. ........................................................................................................................... 1026
Borderless printng not possible. .......................................................................................................................... 1027
Paper position not suitable for borderless printing. ............................................................................................ 1027

Messages regarding ink 1029


Ink insufficient. ................................................................................................................................................... 1029
No ink left. ........................................................................................................................................................... 1029
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. .................................................................................... 1029
Close Ink Tank Cover .......................................................................................................................................... 1030
Ink tank is empty. ................................................................................................................................................ 1030
Not much ink is left. ............................................................................................................................................ 1031
No ink tank loaded. .............................................................................................................................................. 1031
Wrong ink tank. ................................................................................................................................................... 1031

Messages regarding printing or adjustment 1032


Cannot execute this command. Use other paper. ................................................................................................. 1032
Cannot calibrate. .................................................................................................................................................. 1032
Excessive temperature or humidity. .................................................................................................................... 1032
Borderless printng not possible. Paper stretched or shrank. ................................................................................ 1033
Before borderless printing, move the blue platen switch. ................................................................................... 1033
Blue platen switch is dirty. .................................................................................................................................. 1033
Move the blue platen switch No.xx to the right. (xx represents a number) ......................................................... 1033
Cannot adjust paper feed. .................................................................................................................................... 1033
Check printed document. ..................................................................................................................................... 1034

Messages regarding printheads 1035


Cannot adjust printhead. ...................................................................................................................................... 1035
PHeads: wrong pos. ............................................................................................................................................ 1035
Wrong x printhead. (x is L, R, or not displayed) ................................................................................................. 1035
x printhead error (x is L, R, or not displayed) ..................................................................................................... 1035
No x printhead (x is L, R, or not displayed) ........................................................................................................ 1036
Execute printhead cleaning. ................................................................................................................................. 1036

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge 1037


No maintenance cartridge. ................................................................................................................................... 1037
Wrong maintenance cartridge. ............................................................................................................................. 1037
Maint. cart. The level is low ................................................................................................................................ 1037
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. ................................................................................................................... 1037
Maintenance cartridge full. .................................................................................................................................. 1037
Maintenance cartridge problem. .......................................................................................................................... 1038

Messages regarding the hard disk 1039


Hard disk error. .................................................................................................................................................... 1039
File read error. ..................................................................................................................................................... 1039
The mail box is full. ............................................................................................................................................. 1039
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. ............................................................................................... 1039
Mail box nearly full. ............................................................................................................................................ 1040
Maximum jobs stored. ......................................................................................................................................... 1040
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data .................................................................................................................... 1040

Other Messages 1041


GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) .............................................................................................................. 1041
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ......................................................................................... 1041
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ..................................................................... 1041
Top cover is open. ................................................................................................................................................ 1042
Prepare for parts replacement. ............................................................................................................................. 1042
Parts replacement time has passed. ...................................................................................................................... 1042
Unknown file. ...................................................................................................................................................... 1042
Calibration There is a problem with the multi-sensor. ....................................................................................... 1042
Multi-sensor error ................................................................................................................................................ 1042

Appendix 1043
How to use this manual 1044
About This User Manual ..................................................................................................................................... 1044
Searching Topics ................................................................................................................................................. 1045
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing ......................................................................................................... 1047

Disposal of the product 1054


WEEE Directive .................................................................................................................................................. 1054
Basic Printing Workflow >

Basic Printing Workflow


Printing procedure 2

Canceling print jobs 11

Pausing Printing 15

iPF8300
Basic Printing Workflow > Printing procedure >

Printing procedure
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets ...................................................................................................... 2
Loading and Printing on Rolls ....................................................................................................................... 3
Loading and Printing on Sheets .................................................................................................................... 6
Printing in Windows ...................................................................................................................................... 8
Printing from Mac OS X ................................................................................................................................ 9

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets


1 The printer supports both rolls and sheets.
This section introduces the main features of each, as well as the main printing methods available. Select rolls or sheets
to suit your particular printing application.
Note
• For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (See
"Types of Paper.") →P.719
• A variety of other ways to print are available besides those introduced here. Choose the printing method
that suits your particular printing application, referring to "Working with Various Print Jobs" and "En-
hanced Printing Options" from the table of contents.

Roll printing
Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media. Rolls are loaded on the Roll Holder, which are in turn loaded in
the printer.
Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.
• Large-format printing
Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Office applications.
(See "Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing).") →P.104
• Borderless printing
Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.
(See "Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size.") →P.90
(See "Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width.") →P.97
(See "Borderless Printing at Actual Size.") →P.83
• Banner printing
You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
(See "Printing Multiple Pages Continuously.") →P.126
• 90-degree rotation before printing
Originals in portrait orientation are rotated 90 degrees when possible to use paper more efficiently.
(See "Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees.") →P.154
2
• Enlarged/reduced printing
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.
(See "Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size.") →P.58
(See "Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width.") →P.64
(See "Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.") →P.69
• Free Layout function
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs,
and so on) next to each other.
(See "Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other.") →P.121

Sheet printing
Sheets refer to individual sheets of paper.
Insert the sheet between the Platen and the Paper Retainer.

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets iPF8300


Basic Printing Workflow > Printing procedure >

• Enlarged/reduced printing
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.
(See "Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size.") →P.58
(See "Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.") →P.69
• Free Layout function
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs,
and so on) next to each other.
(See "Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other.") →P.121

Loading and Printing on Rolls


These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls. 1
Follow these steps to load and print on rolls.
Note
• If you are not using the optional Media Take-up Unit when printing long documents such as banners,
spread a clean cloth or paper on the floor. Use the Output Stacker to prevent long printed documents
from being soiled by the floor after they are printed. (See "Using the Output Stacker.") →P.761
• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide. (See
"Paper Sizes.") →P.722 (See "Types of Paper.") →P.719
• If you prefer to wait for the ink to dry after printing and simply eject the document, you can deactivate
automatic cutting and cut the paper manually. (See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.")
→P.744

1. Turn the printer on. (See "Turning the Printer On and Off.") →P.837

iPF8300 Loading and Printing on Rolls


Basic Printing Workflow > Printing procedure >

2. Load the roll on the Roll Holder. (See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") →P.725

3. Load the roll in the printer. (See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") →P.728

Loading and Printing on Rolls iPF8300


Basic Printing Workflow > Printing procedure >

Note
• Before borderless printing, make sure the blue Switch on the platen is set toward the ● side. (See
"Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen.") →P.998

4. Select the type of paper. (See "Changing the Type of Paper.") →P.734

Note
• If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On, specify
the roll length after the type of paper. (See "Specifying the Paper Length.") →P.736

5. Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) →P.187

• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) →P.450

iPF8300 Loading and Printing on Rolls


Basic Printing Workflow > Printing procedure >

6. Send the print job.


• Printing in Windows →P.8

• Printing from Mac OS X →P.9

The printer now starts printing the print job.

Loading and Printing on Sheets


These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing.
Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets.
Note
6 • For details on supported types and sizes of paper, see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide. (See
"Paper Sizes.") →P.722 (See "Types of Paper.") →P.719

1. Turn the printer on. (See "Turning the Printer On and Off.") →P.837

Loading and Printing on Sheets iPF8300


Basic Printing Workflow > Printing procedure >

2. Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) →P.187

• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) →P.450

3. Send the print job.


• Printing in Windows →P.8

• Printing from Mac OS X →P.9

iPF8300 Loading and Printing on Sheets


Basic Printing Workflow > Printing procedure >

4. Load the sheet. (See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") →P.751

Start printing.

Printing in Windows
Print from the application menu.
Important
• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.
8
1. In the source application, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

Printing in Windows iPF8300


Basic Printing Workflow > Printing procedure >

2. After confirming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.
Note
• The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the software application. In most cases, the
dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range
of pages, number of copies, and so on.
Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application

• If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the
dialog box displayed after clicking Printer.

Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are dis-
played in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows.
• From the application
(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows).") →P.193

• From the operating system menu


(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows).") →P.195

Printing from Mac OS X


Print from the application menu after registering the printer.
Important
• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while 9
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.

Registering the printer


Before printing, you must register the printer in imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup.app.
For instructions on registering the printer, see "Configuring the Printer Driver Destination ." →P.912

Important
• During this setup process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is off or disconnec-
ted.

iPF8300 Printing from Mac OS X


Basic Printing Workflow > Printing procedure >

Printing from the application software

1. In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
Note
• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

2. Select the printer in the Printer list.

3. Click Print to start printing.


As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for
various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.

10

Printing from Mac OS X iPF8300


Basic Printing Workflow > Canceling print jobs >

Canceling print jobs


Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel .............................................................................................. 11
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows ........................................................................................................... 12
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X .......................................................................................................... 13

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel


To cancel printing or reception of print jobs, press the Stop button on the Control Panel.

When you press the Stop button during printing, printer operation varies depending on the current status.
• If you press the Stop button before printing starts
Pressing the Stop button before printing starts will display a confirmation message. To cancel the print job, select
"Yes".

• If you press the Stop button during printing


Pressing the Stop button during printing will display a confirmation message. To cancel the print job immediately,
select "Yes".

11

iPF8300 Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel


Basic Printing Workflow > Canceling print jobs >

Canceling Print Jobs from Windows


In the printer window, you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, you can cancel print jobs that have already been received by the printer or that
are currently being printed.

1. Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window.
Note
• You can also display this window by double-clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes
(or Printers ) folder, accessible through the Windows start menu.

1 2. Right-click the job to cancel and select Cancel.

3. If the job to cancel is not shown in the printer window (that is, if the print data has already been received by the
printer), double-click the taskbar icon to display imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

4. On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job.

12

Note
• The screen may differ slightly depending on the model you are using.

Canceling Print Jobs from Windows iPF8300


Basic Printing Workflow > Canceling print jobs >

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X


In the printer window, you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer.
Otherwise, you can cancel jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor if they have been received by the printer or are
currently being printed.
Note
• Print jobs are shown in the printer window while they are being sent from the computer. After transmis-
sion, jobs are not displayed even during printing.
• Print jobs are displayed in the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window from the moment the printer starts
receiving the print data until the moment printing is finished. They are not displayed before print data is
sent to the printer, even if the computer has started preparing the print data.
1
1. Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window.
2. Click Pause Printer to stop printing.

3. If there are no jobs in the printer window that can be canceled, (that is, if the print data has already been sent to
the printer), click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

13

iPF8300 Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X


Basic Printing Workflow > Canceling print jobs >

4. Select the print job to cancel and click to delete the print job.

Note
• The screen may differ slightly depending on the model you are using.

The job sent to the printer is canceled.

5. Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. In the printer window, click Start Jobs.


Important
• Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. If you do
not restart job processing, the next job cannot be printed.

14

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X iPF8300


Basic Printing Workflow > Pausing Printing >

Pausing Printing
Pausing Printing .......................................................................................................................................... 15

Pausing Printing
During printing, if you set Pause Print in the Control Panel menu to On, printing is stopped at that point and the printer
enters a state in which printing is paused. (See "Control Panel Display.") →P.839
Printing from the job queue is not possible in this state.
To restore normal operation after this state, set Pause Print to Off.
Note 1
• In the following cases, the status is cleared even if you do not set Pause Print to Off, and printing from
the job queue resumes.
• When paper is advanced
• When you execute Chg. Paper Type in the Paper Menu

1. During printing, on the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Job tab ( ).

Note
• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2. Press the OK button.


The Job Menu is displayed.

3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Pause Print, and then press the OK button.


4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select On or Off, and then press the OK button.

15

iPF8300 Pausing Printing


Working With Various Print Jobs >

Working With Various Print Jobs


Printing Photos and Images 17

Printing Office Documents 33

16

iPF8300
Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

Printing Photos and Images


Printing Photos and Images ........................................................................................................................ 17
Printing Photos and Images (Windows) .................................................................................................. 18
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ................................................................................................ 20
Printing from Photoshop .............................................................................................................................. 24
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows) ................................................................................................. 25
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) ............................................................................................... 28

Printing Photos and Images


Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.
2
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.

Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Print targets for photos and images

Print Target Description


Photo (Color) Suitable for printing photographic images captured with
a digital camera.

Photo (Monochrome) Suitable for optimized printing of monochrome photos.

Poster The best setting for posters. Prints using vivid and high
impact colors.

Faithful Color Repro- Prints by minimizing color differences. Suitable for


17
duction when the printing results are too vivid or when printing
scanned images.

Photo (Adobe RGB) Setting optimized for printing in colors matching those
of images created using the Adobe RGB color space.

iPF8300 Printing Photos and Images


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

Important
• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.

Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also fine-tune these values as needed. ( Advanced Settings )
For details on Advanced Settings, see "Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for
Printing →P.49 "

Print Quality
Choose the print quality.
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.
2 Print Quality Description
Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode
offers superior printing quality.
High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in Standard or Draft modes,
but this mode offers exceptional printing quality.
Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are
both important.
Printing takes less time than in Highest or High mode.
Draft Choose this setting to print faster.
Printing in draft mode can help you work more efficiently when checking lay-
outs.

For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and oper-
ating system.
• Printing Photos and Images (Windows) →P.18

• Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) →P.20

Printing Photos and Images (Windows)


This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
• Document: Photo image from a digital camera
• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
• Paper: Roll
18 • Paper type: Premium Glossy Paper 200
• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

Printing Photos and Images (Windows) iPF8300


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Premium Glossy Paper 200.
In the A Media Type, choose the type of paper used for printing, such as Glossy Paper, Coated Paper, and so
on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel )
is updated when you install the Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if
you change paper information by using the Media Configuration Tool. For details, see Media
Configuration Tool →P.412 .

5. After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Color) in the E Print Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Set-
tings.

19

iPF8300 Printing Photos and Images (Windows)


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click 10"x12".
8. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.
9. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
10. Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings (Windows) →P.185 "

11. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.


Note
• For instructions on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows)
→P.189 "

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)


20
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
• Document: Photo image from a digital camera
• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Premium Glossy Paper 200
• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

21

iPF8300 Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Premium Glossy Paper 200.
Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control
Panel ) are updated when you install the Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-
ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Configuration Tool. For details, see
Media Configuration Tool →P.628 .

7. After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Color) in the E Print Target list.
Note
• For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see "Printing Photos and
Images →P.17 "
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View set..

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

22

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.
11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, 10 in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

23

iPF8300 Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

12. Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specified in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box—in this case, 10"x12".

13. Specify additional printing conditions.


For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X) →P.448 "

14. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Printing from Photoshop


You can print images in the Adobe RGB color space that you have created in Photoshop, the Adobe Systems photo
retouching application. Using the dedicated Photoshop printer driver plug-in (provided with the printer) makes it easy to
print Adobe RGB images more attractively.

Using the Plug-in to Print


The imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop is a dedicated plug-in provided with the printer that you can load in
Photoshop and customize for your printing needs. By using the plug-in, you can print while preserving the 16-bit RGB
data from Photoshop without losing the exceptional color gradations of original image. Some of the settings and cus-
tomizations available in the plug-in are as follows.
• Automatic detection of the color space (sRGB or Adobe RGB) for automatic selection of the optimal profile. This
24 feature eliminates the need to complete intricate settings when printing Adobe RGB images.
• Advanced gray adjustment, including adjustment of tone curves, in addition to an array of standard adjustments for
color balance, brightness, contrast, highlight, and shadow.
• Fine-tune color tones in Photoshop while viewing a preview that accurately reproduces printing results.
• With print log management, you can save and load setting parameters from past print jobs.
Note
• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop for Windows and Macintosh are provided with the printer.

For instructions and details on which versions of Photoshop are compatible with the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for
Photoshop, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional →P.283

Printing from Photoshop iPF8300


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

• Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional →P.561

Using the Printer Driver to Print


The printer driver offers the following settings and adjustments.
• Choose the standard sRBG color space or Adobe RGB as desired.
• Adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, saturation, and gray levels.

For instructions on using the printer driver to print Adobe RGB images created in Photoshop, refer to the following
topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows) →P.25

• Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) →P.28

2
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)
This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.
• Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop
• Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Premium Glossy Paper 200
• Roll Paper Width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Important
• In Photoshop, select no color-matching.
• In the printer driver settings, select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space.

1. In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.


Note
• The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS2.
• For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.

2. Choose Print with Preview from the File menu to display the Print dialog box.
3. Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.
4. In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.
5. Click Print to display the Print dialog box. 25

6. Select the printer and click Properties to display the printer driver dialog box.

iPF8300 Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

7. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

8. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Premium Glossy Paper
200.

9. Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

26

10. Click Image in the E Print Priority list.

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows) iPF8300


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

11. Select the print quality in the F Print Quality list.


Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.

12. Click Color in the G Color Mode list.


13. Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.

14. Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.

27

15. In A Matching Mode, click Driver Matching Mode.


iPF8300 Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)
Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

16. In C Color Space, click Adobe RGB.


17. Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
18. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

19. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the source application. In this case, click
10"x12".

20. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.
21. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm),
and then click OK.

22. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.


Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

28
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.
• Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop
• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Premium Glossy Paper 200
• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

Important
• In Photoshop, select no color-matching.
• In the printer driver settings, select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space.

1. In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.


Note
• The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS2.
• For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.

2. Choose Print with Preview from the Photoshop menu to display the Print dialog box.
3. Make sure the setting mode is Color Management. 2
4. In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.
5. Click Print.
6. Access the Main pane.

7. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Premium Glossy Paper 29
200.

iPF8300 Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X)


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

8. Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

9. Click Image in the E Print Priority list.


10. Select the print quality in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the type of paper.

11. Click Color in the H Color Mode list.


12. Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
13. Click Matching to display the Matching pane.
14. In Matching Mode, click Driver Matching Mode.
15. In Color Space, click Adobe RGB.
30 16. Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

17. Access the Page Setup pane.

18. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.
19. Make sure the width of the loaded roll paper is displayed in the B Roll Width list—here, 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

31

20. Make sure C Page Size in the Page Setup pane matches the size of the original as specified in Photoshop—in
this case, 10"x12".

iPF8300 Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X)


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Photos and Images >

21. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X)." →P.452

32

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Office Documents >

Printing Office Documents


Printing Office Documents .......................................................................................................................... 33
Printing Office Documents (Windows) .................................................................................................... 34
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X) .................................................................................................. 35

Printing Office Documents


Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.

Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
2
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Print targets for office documents

Print Target Description


Office Document Settings optimized for clear printing of office docu-
ments such as handouts.

Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also fine-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see "Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for
Printing →P.49 "

Print Quality
Choose the print quality.
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.

Print Quality Description


Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode
offers superior printing quality. 33
High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in Standard or Draft modes,
but this mode offers exceptional printing quality.
Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are
both important.
Printing takes less time than in Highest or High mode.
Draft Choose this setting to print faster.
Printing in draft mode can help you work more efficiently when checking lay-
outs.

For instructions on printing office documents, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and oper-
ating system.

iPF8300 Printing Office Documents


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Office Documents >

• Printing Office Documents (Windows) →P.34

• Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X) →P.35

Printing Office Documents (Windows)


This topic describes how to print office documents based on the following example.
• Document: Office document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Sheets
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
2 1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

34
4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Office Document in the E Print Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Set-
tings.

Printing Office Documents (Windows) iPF8300


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Office Documents >

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.
8. Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.
9. Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings (Windows) →P.185 "

10. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.


Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to print office documents based on the following example.
• Document: Office document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs
35
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Sheets
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

iPF8300 Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Office Documents >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - for Paper Tray (Large Mar-
gins).

4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

36

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Office Documents >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7. After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Office Document in the E Print Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View set..

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.


9. Access the Page Setup pane.

37

10. Click Cut Sheet in the A Paper Source list.

iPF8300 Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)


Working With Various Print Jobs > Printing Office Documents >

11. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, ISO A4 - for Paper Tray (Large Margins).

12. Specify additional printing conditions.


For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X) →P.448 "

13. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

38

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options >

Enhanced Printing Options


Adjusting Images 40

Choosing Paper for Printing 57

Printing enlargements or reductions 58

Printing at full size 77

Borderless Printing 90

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes 104

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 121

Centering originals 142


3
Conserving roll paper 154

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals 165

Checking Images Before Printing 168

Other useful settings 170

39

iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

Adjusting Images
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ...................................................................................................... 40
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) ........................................................................... 43
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) .......................................................................... 46
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ....................................................... 49
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) ........................................................ 51
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) ...................................................... 54

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver


Color settings specified in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings for each
print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver.

3 Color Mode
Choose how the printer driver processes color, as desired.
The available options vary depending on the color mode.

Color Mode Description Color Adjustment


Color Print in color. You can select the color balance and
color matching functions.
Monochrome (Photo) Grayscale printing optimized for You can adjust the color balance in
monochrome photos. ways tailored to monochrome pho-
tos.
Monochrome Print in grayscale. You can adjust the color balance.
No color correction (*1) Prints without performing color- You can adjust the color balance.
matching in the printer driver.

*1: If No color correction is selected, the Matching sheet / Matching pane is not displayed.

Color Adjustment
You can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.

Adjustment Item Description


Cyan Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.
Magenta
Yellow
Gray Tone Adjust the grayscale, in a range from cool, blue tones to warm, red tones.
40
Brightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest
portions intact.
Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the con-
trast.
Saturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

Note
• Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the
color adjustment target from Image, Graphics, and Text.

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

Matching
You can choose the color-matching mode and method.
By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of on-screen images
more closely.
Important
• If No color correction is selected under Color Mode, the Matching cannot be changed.

Matching Mode Description Remarks


Driver Matching Mode Enables printing of optimal color You should normally select this
tones using a driver specific color mode.
profile. You should also select this mode if
you want to use ambient light adjust-
ment.
ICC Matching Mode Enables color matching using ICC This allows you to use ICC profiles
profiles. for digital cameras and scanners, 3
Select this if you want to print by ICC profiles created using the profile
specifying the input profile, printer creation tool, etc.
profile, and matching method in de-
tail.
Driver ICM Mode Enables color matching by the Available when using Windows.
printer driver using the ICM func-
tion of printer driver.
Select this if you want to print by
only specifying the matching meth-
od.
Host ICM Mode Enables color matching by the host
computer using the ICM function of
Windows.
Select this if you want to print from
an application that supports the
ICM function.
ColorSync Enables color matching by using Available when using Mac OS.
the ColorSync function of Mac OS.
Select this if you want to perform
soft proofing using ColorSync be-
fore printing.

Matching Method Description Remarks


Auto Color-matching optimized for im- The available options and their dis-
ages, graphics, or text. play order vary depending on your
selected color-matching mode, as
Perceptual Color-matching optimized for print-
well as the operating system. 41
ing typical photos attractively.
Smooth gradation is a feature. This
is also an easy-to-use mode when
performing color adjustment using
application software.
Perceptual (People, Dark Areas) Color-matching optimized for print-
ing subdued photos such as indoor
shots of people or dark scenes.
Along with preventing the grada-
tion loss of dark areas, you can real-
ize photos of people in warm tones.

iPF8300 Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

Matching Method Description Remarks


Colorimetric Color-matching optimized for print- The available options and their dis-
ing image data with accurate colors play order vary depending on your
in input color space. This is the selected color-matching mode, as
easiest-to-use mode when you want well as the operating system.
to adjust the color and print. How-
ever, gradation may be lost for col-
ors of wider range than the color re-
production range of the printer.
Generally, this is also called rela-
tive colorimetric.
Colorimetric (No Wht-pnt Corr) The processing method of color-
matching is identical to Colorimet-
ric. Use this when you want to fur-
ther reproduce the target paper ma-
terial color of the image data. Gen-
3 erally, this also is called absolute
colorimetric.
Saturation Color-matching optimized for print-
ing posters, etc., vividly.
Monitor Matching Suitable for optimized printing to
match the appearance on the moni-
tor.
Color-matching optimized for accu-
rately reproducing colors on the
calibrated sRGB or AdobeRGB
monitor.

Gray Tone Adjustment


The following settings can be adjusted if Monochrome (Photo) is selected in Color Mode.

Gray Adjustment Items Description


Color Balance Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose cool
black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and
so on.
Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.
Brightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest
portions intact.
Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as
desired.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the con-
trast.
42 Highlight Adjust levels of image highlight areas.
Shadow Adjust levels of image shadow areas.

Note
• Be sure to calibrate your monitor colors correctly if you adjust the colors for printing. If monitor colors
are not calibrated correctly, you may not obtain the desired printing results. For instructions on monitor
calibration, refer to the documentation for your monitor and operating system.

For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating sys-
tem.
• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) →P.43

• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) →P.46

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)


You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to fine-tune
the color tone of photos before printing.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

43

iPF8300 Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

5. Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

6. Click Color in the G Color Mode list.


7. Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.

44

8. On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item Description

D Cyan Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.

E Magenta
F Yellow
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

Adjustment Item Description

G Gray Tone Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose cool
black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and
so on. Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.
H Brightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest
portions intact.
I Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the con-
trast.
J Saturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

Note
• Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to se-
lect the color adjustment target from Image, Graphics, and Text.

9. Close the Color Settings dialog box. 3

10. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

11. Confirm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on. 45

12. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.


Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

iPF8300 Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)


You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to fine-tune
the color tone of photos before printing.

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. Choose the original size in the F Paper Size list.
46
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
7. Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

47

8. Click Color in the H Color Mode list.

iPF8300 Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

9. Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.

10. On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item Description

D Cyan Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.

E Magenta
F Yellow
G Gray Tone Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose cool
black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and
so on. Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.
H Brightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest
portions intact.
I Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the con-
trast.
J Saturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

48 Note
• Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to se-
lect the color adjustment target from Images, Graphics, and Text.

11. Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

12. Access the Page Setup pane.

13. Confirm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.


14. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing


You can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.

Advanced Settings
For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and colors to
prioritize for printing.
Note
• Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. To use the presets, simply choose the
printing application.
For details on Easy Settings, refer to the following topics. 49
• Printing Photos and Images →P.17

• Printing Office Documents →P.33

Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

Print Priority (*1) Description


Image A setting for posters or other documents made up mainly of photos or images, or
for emphasizing photos or images in printed documents.

iPF8300 Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

Print Priority (*1) Description


Line Drawing/Text Choose this setting for CAD drawings made up mainly of intricate lines, or wall
newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text. Suitable for empha-
sizing detailed text in printed documents.
However, the quality may not be sufficient when printing photos or images that
require a lot of color coverage. In this case, choose Image instead.
Office Document Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graph-
ics, such as documents and presentation material created with typical office ap-
plications.

*1: Options suitable for the selected type of paper are listed under Print Priority.

Print Quality
Choose the print quality.
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.
3 Print Quality (*1) Description Print Priority
Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolu- Image
tion when quality is most important. Print-
ing takes longer and consumes more ink
than in other modes, but this mode offers
superior printing quality.
High Choose this setting to print at high resolu- Image
tion when quality is most important. Line Drawing/Text
Printing takes longer and consumes more
ink than in Standard or Draft modes, but
this mode offers exceptional printing quali-
ty.
Standard Choose this setting to print at standard reso- Image
lution when quality and speed are both im- Line Drawing/Text
portant. Office Document
Printing takes less time than in Highest or
High mode.
Draft Choose this setting to print faster. Image
Printing in draft mode can help you work Line Drawing/Text
more efficiently when checking layouts.

*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality.

Color Settings

Setting Item Options Description


50 Color Mode (*1) Color Choose whether to print in color or
Monochrome (Photo) monochrome.
Monochrome (Refer to "Adjusting the Color in
No color correction the Printer Driver →P.40 ")
Color Adjustment (Images) Cyan You can adjust the levels of cyan,
Magenta magenta, and yellow as well as the
Color Adjustment (Graphics)
Yellow brightness, contrast, saturation, and
Color Adjustment (Text) Gray Tone gray tone separately for images,
Brightness graphics, and text documents.
Contrast If you choose Monochrome in Col-
Saturation or Mode only Brightness and Con-
trast can be adjusted.

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

Setting Item Options Description


Gray Adjustment Color Balance Choose the gray tone color balance ( Cool Black
Brightness or Warm Black ) and adjust levels
Contrast of brightness, contrast, highlight, and
Highlight shadow as desired.
Shadow These levels can be adjusted when
Monochrome (Photo) is selected in
Color Mode.
Color-Matching Modes Driver Matching Mode Choose the color-matching mode.
ICC Matching Mode Other color-matching modes may be
provided by the computer operating
system, such as ICM and ColorSync.
Color-Matching Method (*2) Auto Choose the color-matching method.
Perceptual The available options vary depend-
Perceptual (People, Dark Areas) ing on your selection in Color-
Saturation Matching Mode.
Monitor Matching 3
Colorimetric
other
Color Space (*3) sRGB Choose a standard color space ( sRGB
Adobe RGB ) or an expanded color space ( Adobe RGB
).

*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority and Media Type are listed under Color Mode.
*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.
*3: Adobe RGB is not available if an incompatible combination of the paper type and print quality is selected.

Enhancing printing quality

Setting Item Description


High-Precision Photographs Print with improved gradation and uniformity, particularly for high-precision
photographs. However, this takes more time than regular printing.
Thicken Fine Lines Prints making fine lines appear thicker.
Unidirectional Printing Prints by suppressing color variations and misaligned ruled lines. However, this
takes more time than regular printing.
High-Precision Text and Fine Increases the accuracy of ink placement, and prints text and fine lines in particu-
Lines lar more clearly. However, this takes more time than regular printing.

Note
• If you desire even higher quality, set the Print Quality to High or Highest in the printer driver and se-
lect the Unidirectional Printing and High-Precision Text and Fine Lines check boxes before printing.
51
For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following topics, as appro-
priate for your computer and operating system.
• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) →P.51

• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) →P.54

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)


You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how print photo-
graphic images in monochrome.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


iPF8300 Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(Refer to "Accessing the
Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
5. Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

52

6. Click Image in the E Print Priority list.

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

7. Click High (600dpi) in the F Print Quality list.


Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the type of paper.

8. Click Monochrome in the G Color Mode list.


9. To adjust the brightness and contrast, click H Color Settings.
Note
• For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer
Driver." →P.40

10. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
3

11. Confirm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on.
12. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
53
• For details on how to check the printing settings, refer to "Confirming Print Settings (Windows)
→P.189 ".

iPF8300 Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X)


You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how print photo-
graphic images in monochrome.

1. Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

2. Select the printer in the B Format for list.


3. Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
4. Click F OK to close the dialog box.
5. In the application menu, choose Print.
6. Access the Main pane.

54

7. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

8. Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

9. Click Image in the E Print Priority list.


10. Click High (600dpi) in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.

11. Click Monochrome in the H Color Mode list.


12. To adjust the brightness and contrast, click I Set.
Note
• For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer
Driver →P.40 "

55

iPF8300 Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Adjusting Images >

13. Access the Page Setup pane.

14. Confirm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.


15. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

56

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Choosing Paper for Printing >

Choosing Paper for Printing


Choosing a Paper for Printing ..................................................................................................................... 57
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ......................................................................................................... 57

Choosing a Paper for Printing


Choosing the right paper for your particular printing application will give you the best printing results.

Media Type
The printer and printer driver offer print settings optimized for various paper characteristics.
Note
• For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.(See
"Types of Paper →P.719 ") 3
• The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel )
are updated when you install the Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Configuration Tool. For information about the Media Con-
figuration Tool, see the Media Configuration Tool →P.412 (Windows) or Media Configuration
Tool →P.628 (Macintosh).
• An error message may be displayed on the printer Control Panel if the type of paper as specified in the
printer driver does not match the type specified on the printer. Although you can print under these condi-
tions, the printing results may not be suitable.

If the paper type is not listed for selection


If the type of paper loaded cannot be selected, try specifying glossy paper or proofing paper as a special paper (Special
1 to Special 5, in this order). BK ( Black Ink ) is used as the black ink. Try specifying other types of paper as Special 6
to Special 10. MBK ( Matte Black Ink ) is used as the black ink. Note that higher numbers in this setting enable more
vivid colors but may also cause colors to run together.
Furthermore, Register Custom Paper can also be performed using the Media Configuration Tool.
For information about the Media Configuration Tool, see Media Configuration Tool →P.412 (Windows) or Media
Configuration Tool →P.628 (Macintosh).

For instructions on specifying the paper type before printing, refer to the following topics.
• Changing the Type of Paper →P.734

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver


If you replace the paper, complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size. 57
For instructions on configuring paper settings in the printer driver, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) →P.187

• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) →P.450

iPF8300 Choosing a Paper for Printing


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

Printing enlargements or reductions


Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size ................................................................................................ 58
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) .......................................................................... 58
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) ........................................................................ 60
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ....................................................................................................... 64
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ................................................................................. 64
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) ............................................................................... 66
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value .......................................................................................... 69
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) .................................................................... 70
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) .................................................................. 72

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size


3 You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

Fit Paper Size


Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your com-
puter and operating system.
• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) →P.58

• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) →P.60

Note
58 • For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an
image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi
or more at actual size.

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)


This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Plain Paper

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.

59

iPF8300 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
9. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.
10. Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
11. Select the D Fit Paper Size check box.
12. Click ISO A3 in the G Paper Size list.
13. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

60

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

61

iPF8300 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.

62

10. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3
(420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specified in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box—in this case, ISO A4.

63

13. Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.


14. Make sure E Fit Paper Size is selected.
15. Click ISO A3 in the I Paper Size list.

iPF8300 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

16. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width


You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

Fit Roll Paper Width


3 Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.

For instructions on resizing originals to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) →P.64

• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) →P.66

Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an
image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi
or more at actual size.

64

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)


This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
• Document: Any type
• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

65

7. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


iPF8300 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").

9. Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.


Note
• If the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear
the B Borderless Printing check box.

10. Click E Fit Roll Paper Width.


Note
• After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the
width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list and click OK.
• Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.

11. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.


Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "
66

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

67

iPF8300 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.

68

10. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, 16 in. (406.4mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, ISO A4.

13. Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.


14. Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.
15. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value


You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

Enlarged/Reduced Printing
69
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

iPF8300 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

Scaling
Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.

For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)
3 →P.70

• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) →P.72

Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an
image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi
or more at actual size.

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)


This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following exam-
ple.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Important
• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
70 Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

71

7. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
iPF8300 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

9. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.
10. Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
11. Click ISO A4 in the G Paper Size list.
12. Click F Scaling and enter 120.
Note
• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portions off the bot-
tom and right edges of the paper will not be printed.
• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is
printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting E Print Cen-
tered on the Layout sheet.
3

13. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.


Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

72
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following exam-
ple.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

73

iPF8300 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.

74

10. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3
(420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, ISO A4.

75

13. Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

iPF8300 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing enlargements or reductions >

14. Click G Scaling and enter 120.


Note
• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge
of the paper will not be printed.
• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is
printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting the J Print
Centered check box.

15. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

76

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

Printing at full size


Printing on Oversized Paper ....................................................................................................................... 77
Printing at Full Size (Windows) ............................................................................................................... 78
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) ............................................................................................................. 79
Borderless Printing at Actual Size ............................................................................................................... 83
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) ......................................................................................... 84
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) ....................................................................................... 86

Printing on Oversized Paper


Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to your selected paper size minus the space for a
margin (See "Print Area →P.884 "). To print documents or images you prepare without a margin at actual size, use
an oversized paper size.
For example, to print a A4-sized original without a margin at A4 size, print it on paper larger than A4 size and cut away 3
the excess margin.
Note
• If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image
near the edge will not be printed.

Oversize
The margin required by the printer is added around the outside of a regular paper size. For example, when printing a
A4-sized original (210×297 mm), you have the following options.

• (a) Regular paper size: Gray area not printed


• (b) Page Size
• (c) Oversized paper size: Print area matches the page size (b) 77
Important
• When printing on oversize paper, load paper larger than the page size—a size that includes the margin
required by the printer.
• Sheets: Load paper that is at least 10 mm (0.39 in) wider and 28 mm (1.10 in) higher than the page size
• Rolls: Load paper that is at least 10 mm (0.39 in) wider and 10 mm (0.39 in) higher than the page size

iPF8300 Printing on Oversized Paper


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

Note
• Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized print-
ing.(See "Paper Sizes →P.722 ")
• Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size ) is only available in Windows.
• To perform oversized printing on a Macintosh computer, you must specify a non-standard page size and
print on it.
• To specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Paper
Size. Oversized printing is not available with Custom Size.(See "Printing on Non-Standard Paper
Sizes →P.113 ")

For instructions on oversized printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating sys-
tem.
• Printing at Full Size (Windows) →P.78
• Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) →P.79

3
Printing at Full Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
• Document: Any Type
• Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

78

Printing at Full Size (Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

6. Click O Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
7. In the Paper Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series.
8. Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
9. Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the A Page Size list.
10. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.
11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
12. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note 79
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Plain Paper

iPF8300 Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In F Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.
80

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.

81

10. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

iPF8300 Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3
(420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specified in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box
—in this case, ISO A4 - Oversize.

82

13. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

Borderless Printing at Actual Size


Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without
a surrounding margin, or border.

Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print
documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Refer-
ence Guide. (See "Types of Paper →P.719 ")
• Paper incompatible with the printer's auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only. 3
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size (Windows only) is selected when performing border-
less printing, Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) cannot be selected.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use.
In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
• On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
• Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.

Borderless Printing Method


Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.

Print Image with Actual Size


Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that exceeds the
dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.

83

iPF8300 Borderless Printing at Actual Size


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

Note
• Not all page sizes are available.
• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged
when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may
affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side
than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate
for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) →P.84

• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) →P.86

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)


3 This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
• Document: Any type
• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1. Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8 mm (10 × 12
in) —that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it fits inside
the paper area to be printed on.

2. Choose Print in the application menu.


3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

84

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.
6. Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

85

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the source application. In this case, click
10"x12".

9. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


iPF8300 Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

10. Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.

11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list—in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
13. In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.
14. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
• Document: Any Type
86 • Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)–Borderless
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click 10"x12" - Border-
less.
Note
• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by —Borderless.

87
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

iPF8300 Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.
7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.

88

10. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing at full size >

11. Confirm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, 10 in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.

89

13. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

iPF8300 Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size ........................................................................................ 90
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ..................................... 91
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) .................................... 93
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ................................................................... 97
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ............................................ 98
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) ......................................... 100

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size


Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without
a surrounding margin, or border.
3
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print
documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Refer-
ence Guide. (Refer to "Types of Paper →P.719 ")
• Paper incompatible with the printer's auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size (Windows only) is selected when performing border-
less printing, Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) cannot be selected.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
slightly uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer
driver. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the
printed document ejected from the printer, then use scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use.
In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
• On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
90 • Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.

Borderless Printing Method


Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

Fit Paper Size


Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

3
Note
• The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on
each side. The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer to the fol-
lowing topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) →P.91

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) →P.93

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)


This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
• Document: Any type
• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1. In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation. 91

2. Choose Print in the application menu.


3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.
6. Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

92

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click 10"x12".
9. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

10. Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.

11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list—in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
13. In C Borderless Printing Method, click D Fit Paper Size.
14. Click Match Page Size in the G Paper Size list.
15. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the following
93
example.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Note
• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.

94 4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.
7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.

95

10. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, 10 in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, 10"x12".

96

13. On the Page Setup pane, select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
14. Select the H Borderless Printing check box.
15. Click E Fit Paper Size under D Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
16. In I Paper Size, click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless.

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

17. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width


Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without
a surrounding margin, or border.

Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print
documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important 3
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Refer-
ence Guide. (See "Types of Paper →P.719 ")
• Paper incompatible with the printer's auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size (Windows only) is selected when performing border-
less printing, Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) cannot be selected.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use.
In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
• On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
• Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.

Borderless Printing Method


Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
97

iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width


Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

Scale to fit Roll Paper Width


Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.

Note
3 • You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width
(relative to portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width, refer to
the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) →P.98

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) →P.100

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)


This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following
example.
• Document: Any type
• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1. In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
98
2. Choose Print in the application menu.
3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.
6. Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

99

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").

9. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

10. Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.

11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list—in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
13. In C Borderless Printing Method, make sure E Scale to fit Roll Paper Width is selected.
14. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following
example.
• Document: Any Type
100
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Note
• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to fit the roll width.

4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and 101
then select Print from the application software menu.

iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.
7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.

102

10. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Borderless Printing >

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, 10 in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, ISO A4.

103

13. Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.


14. Select the H Borderless Printing check box.
This ensures that F Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in D Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

15. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)
Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes


Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) ............................................................... 104
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) .......................................... 105
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) ........................................ 109
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ..................................................................................................... 113
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) ............................................................................... 113
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) ............................................................................. 117

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)


You can create vertical or horizontal banners by printing originals that are in banner format on rolls.
Originals created in Microsoft Word or other applications in your preferred size can be enlarged to fill the width of roll
paper by completing simple printer driver settings.
3

Fit Roll Paper Width


You can easily create vertical or horizontal banners by automatically enlarging or reducing originals to fit the full width
of rolls.
Note
• The maximum supported roll length is 18.0 m or 19.7 yd.

For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your comput-
er and operating system.
• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) →P.105
104 • Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) →P.109

Important
• Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the
remaining roll paper, a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.
• If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.
• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and
choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)


This topic describes how to print a banner about five times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
• Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft Word
• Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: 16 in (406.4 mm)

Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.

1. Register a Custom Paper Size.


Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Paper Size. In this example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7
in) is registered.
2. In the application, create an original in the size you registered. 3
3. Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.

Registering a Custom Paper Size


This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either hori-
zontal or vertical format.

1. Display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating Sys-
tem Menu (Windows) →P.195 ")

2. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

105

3. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


4. Click O Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
5. Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name. My Horizontal Banner is used in this example.
iPF8300 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

6. In Units, click mm.


7. Under Paper Size, enter 100 in Width and 500 in Height.
8. Click Add to add the paper size of My Horizontal Banner.
9. Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
10. Close the printer driver dialog box.
Note
• You can also specify a Custom Size as the paper size. Note that Custom Size settings are not available
after you exit the application.
For more information, see "Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) →P.113 "
3
Creating the banner in the application
Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft Word using the Custom Paper Size you registered.

1. Start Microsoft Word.


2. Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.
3. Under Paper Size, click the Custom Paper Size you registered—My Horizontal Banner in this example.
Important
• If My Horizontal Banner is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.
• In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper
sizes, use the custom paper size setting in Custom and specify 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in)

4. Set the printing orientation to horizontal.


5. Create the banner.
Printing the banner
Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1. Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu.


106
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Poster in the E Print Target list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

107

7. In the A Page Size list, click the size you registered, My Horizontal Banner.

iPF8300 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

8. Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.


Note
• If the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear
the B Borderless Printing check box.

9. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


10. After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed.
11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll (406.4mm), and
then click OK.

12. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.


Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

108

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.

1. On the Layout sheet, click J Special Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box.

2. In the FineZoom Settings list, click Yes.

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X)


109
This topic describes how to print a banner about five times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
• Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner
• Page Size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)

Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.

1. In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.

2. Register a Custom Page Sizes (Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.5)/ Custom Paper Sizes (Mac OS X 10.6).

iPF8300 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Page Sizes (Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.5)/ Custom Pa-
per Sizes (Mac OS X 10.6) in Page Setup. In this example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.
3. Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.

Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.5. The method of setting up non-standard paper
sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

Register a Custom Page Sizes


This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for ban-
ners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1. Create the document in the application.


2. Choose Print in the application menu.
3

3. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


4. Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

110

5. Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want to register. Here, enter
100*500.
If the Untitled size is not listed at left, click + below the list.

6. Under Page Size, enter 10 in Width and 50 in Height. Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

7. Specify the margins by entering 0.3 in Printer Margins. Here, too, measurements are entered in centimeters.
8. Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
9. In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 100*500, the size you registered.
10. In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
11. Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Print the banner
Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1. Choose Print in the application menu. 3


2. Access the Main pane.

3. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
4. Make your selection in the E Print Target list. 111

5. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

iPF8300 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

6. Access the Page Setup pane.

7. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.


8. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, 16 in. (406.4mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.

112

9. In C Page Size, make sure 100*500 is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.


10. Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
11. Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

12. Confirm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes


By specifying the paper size, you can print on non-standard sizes of paper.
There are two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes, as follows.

Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver


After you register non-standard paper sizes, they are listed with standard sizes so that you can choose them anytime as
needed.
Note 3
• These non-standard paper sizes you register in the printer driver are called Custom Paper Size in Win-
dows and Custom Sizes in Mac OS X.

Specifying custom paper sizes for temporary use


Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the
application. If you want to set up a non-standard paper size so that it will always be available, we recommend register-
ing the paper size in the printer driver.
Note
• These temporary paper sizes you register on the printer are called Custom Sizes in Windows.
• This can only be configured in Windows.

For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) →P.113

• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) →P.117

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)


This topic describes two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes.
• Printing by using Custom Size
• Printing by using Custom Paper Size
113
Printing by using Custom Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
• Paper: Sheets
• Paper type: Any type
• Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

1. Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.

iPF8300 Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

2. Choose Print in the application menu.


3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6. After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, select from the E Print Target list.
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

114

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

8. Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.


9. Click Custom Size in the A Page Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
10. Confirm that mm is selected in Units.
11. Enter 430 (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.
12. Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
13. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "
3
Printing by using Custom Paper Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Paper Size based on the following example. First, register a non-
standard paper size called 430 mm Square as a Custom Paper Size.
• Document: Any Type
• Page Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
• Paper: Sheets
• Media Type: Any type
• Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

1. Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.
2. Choose Print in the application menu.
3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

115

iPF8300 Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6. After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, select from the E Print Target list.
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

116

8. Click O Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
9. Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name. 430 mm Square is used in this example.
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

10. Select mm in Units.


11. Enter 430 (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.
Note
• If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box, after you enter a value in
either Width or Height, the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect
ratio.

12. Click Add to register 430 mm Square.


13. Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
14. Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.
3
15. In the A Page Size list, click the size you added,430 mm Square.
16. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)


This section describes how to register and print Custom Page Sizes (Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.5)/ Custom Paper Sizes
(Mac OS X 10.6) based on the following example. Here, you will register a non-standard paper size named 430*430 in
Custom Page Sizes (Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.5)/ Custom Paper Sizes (Mac OS X 10.6).
• Document: Any Type
• Page Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
• Paper: Sheets
• Media Type: Any type
• Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.5. The method of setting up non-standard paper
sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

1. Create the document in the application. 117

2. Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.

iPF8300 Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

3. Choose Print in the application menu.

4. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


5. Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
3

6. In Page Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter 43.00 cm in Height and Width.
7. In Printer Margins, enter 0.5 for the top and side margins and 2.3 for the bottom margin. Here, measurements
are entered in centimeters.

8. Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the paper name—in this
case, 430*430.
118
9. Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
10. In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 430*430, the size you registered.
11. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

12. Access the Main pane.

13. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
14. After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, select from the E Print Target list.
15. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
16. Access the Page Setup pane.

119

17. Click Cut Sheet in the A Paper Source list.


18. In C Page Size, make sure 430*430 is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.

iPF8300 Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes >

19. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

120

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet


Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .......................................................................................... 121
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) .................................................................... 122
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) .................................................................. 124
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously ........................................................................................................ 126
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) .................................................................................. 126
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) ................................................................................ 128
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ............................................................................................................. 131
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) ...................................................................................... 131
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) ..................................................................................... 134
Printing Posters in Sections ...................................................................................................................... 138
Printing Large Posters (Windows) ......................................................................................................... 139

3
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each other
on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand meeting materials, and a
variety of other printed documents.

Free Layout (Windows)


Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple files—even multi-
ple source applications—in a single-page layout.

121

Important
• Free Layout cannot be used in 64-bit version of Windows.

iPF8300 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)


Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple files—even multi-
ple source applications—in a single-page layout.

For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.
• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) →P.122

• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) →P.124

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)


This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.
Important
• Free Layout cannot be used in 64-bit version of Windows.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

122

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

123

5. Select the A Page Layout check box.


6. Click Free Layout in the A Page Layout list.

iPF8300 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

7. When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed. (At this point, the document
will not be printed yet.)

8. Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1–7 to arrange originals
from multiple applications on the same page.

Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout
help topic.

9. Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.


Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout →P.241 .

124
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before print-
ing.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

2. Access the Page Setup pane.

3. Select the N Free Layout check box.


4. Click M Print.
5. The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed.

125

6. Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Note
• Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1 to 4 to ar-
range originals from multiple applications on the same page.
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free
Layout help topic.

iPF8300 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

7. Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.


Note
• For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Lay-
out →P.506 .

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously


You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Roll paper (banner)

Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing, enlargement
or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate
for your computer and operating system.
• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) →P.126

• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) →P.128

126 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)


This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing, enlargement
or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

127

6. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

iPF8300 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

7. Click N Roll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.

8. Select the B Banner Printing check box.


9. Click OK.
10. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
3
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing, enlargement
or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.

128

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. Click the original size in the C Paper Size list.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

129

iPF8300 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.

130

10. Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the A Paper Source list.

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

11. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet


To conserve paper, you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original and dividing the
sheet into areas for each page.

Page Layout
Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.
Note
• You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.
• You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.

Important
• This function cannot be combined with the following options.
• Borderless Printing
• Scaling Originals (Windows)
• Banner Printing (Windows)
• When printing using this function, the Print Centered setting is disabled.

For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and
operating system.
• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) →P.131

• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) →P.134


131

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)


This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in])
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

iPF8300 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
6. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

132

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8. In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specified in the application software. In this case, click ISO A3
or Letter (8.5"x11").

9. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


10. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
11. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

133

12. Select the A Page Layout check box.


iPF8300 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

13. Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the A Page Layout list.


Note
• You can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page
Layout Printing dialog box by clicking B Set.

14. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.


Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to print four pages of an original on a single sheet, based on the following example.
3
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

134

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

135

iPF8300 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

5. Access the Layout pane.

3 6. Click 4 in the A Pages per Sheet list.


Note
• You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in B Layout Di-
rection and C Border.

7. Access the Main pane.

136

8. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
9. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
10. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

11. Access the Page Setup pane.

12. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.
13. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3
(420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

137

iPF8300 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

14. Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specified in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box
—in this case, ISO A3.

15. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Printing Posters in Sections


You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a
poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer.

Page Layout
Choose poster printing.
138 Important
• When printing using this function, the Print Centered, Watermark, No Spaces at Top or Bottom
(Conserve Paper), and Page Options settings are disabled.

For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Printing Large Posters (Windows) →P.139

Note
• This method of poster printing is supported in Windows.

Printing Posters in Sections iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

Printing Large Posters (Windows)


You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a
poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge an A2 original
for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.
• Document: Poster
• Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
• Paper: Sheets
• Paper Size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")
3
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
5. Click Poster in the E Print Target list. 139

iPF8300 Printing Large Posters (Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7. In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A2.
8. Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.
9. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

140

10. Select the A Page Layout check box.

Printing Large Posters (Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Tiling and multiple pages per sheet >

11. Click Poster (2 x 2) in the A Page Layout list.


Note
• Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.
• Click B Set under A Page Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.
• On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.
• Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.

12. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.


Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

141

iPF8300 Printing Large Posters (Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls ......................................................................................................... 142
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) ................................................................................... 142
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) ................................................................................. 144
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ...................................................................................................... 148
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) ................................................................................ 148
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) .............................................................................. 150

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls


You can print originals centered on a page—for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing
the original.

3 Centering originals relative to roll paper width


If you use originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.
Print Centered
Aligns the center of the original with the center of the roll, relative to the width.

For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your com-
puter and operating system.
• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) →P.142

• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) →P.144

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)


This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
• Document: Any type
• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
142 • Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

143

7. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").

8. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


iPF8300 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

9. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm).
10. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

11. Select the E Print Centered check box.


12. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Roll paper
144 • Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

145

iPF8300 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.

146

10. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Width —in this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, ISO A4.

147

13. Select the J Print Centered check box.


14. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

iPF8300 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets


You can print originals centered on a page—for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing
the original.

Centering originals on sheets


If you use paper larger than the original size or print originals after reduction, the printed images may be aligned in the
upper-left corner of the paper. In this case, you can center originals on sheets when printing.
Print Centered
Aligns the center of the original with the center of the sheet.

For instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) →P.148

• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) →P.150

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)


This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Sheets
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

148

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

149

7. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.
8. Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
iPF8300 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

9. Click Match Page Size in the G Paper Size list.


10. Click F Scaling and enter 50.
11. Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.
12. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

13. Select the E Print Centered check box.


14. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Important
• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control
panel to enter the paper size.

150
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4
• Paper: Sheets
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Paper size: Non-standard

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Cut Sheet.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

151

iPF8300 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.

152

10. Click Cut Sheet in the A Paper Source list.

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Centering originals >

11. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, ISO A4 - Cut Sheet.

12. Select the J Print Centered check box.


13. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Important
• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to
enter the paper size.

153

iPF8300 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

Conserving roll paper


Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees ........................................................................ 154
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) .................................................. 154
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) ................................................ 156
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins ....................................... 159
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) ................. 159
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) ................ 161

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees


You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)


3 When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it fits within the
roll width. This enables you to conserve paper.

Important
• If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to fit Roll Paper
Width to print rotated pages.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) →P.154

• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) →P.156

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows)


This topic describes how to conserve paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following ex-
ample.

154 • Document: Any type


• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in)
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90
degrees to fit within the width of A3/A4 roll paper (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

155

6. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").

7. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm).
iPF8300 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows)
Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

9. Select the K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.


10. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following
example.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
3 • Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90
degrees to fit within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

156

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7. Access the Page Setup pane.

157

8. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

iPF8300 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

9. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Width —in this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

10. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, ISO A4.

158

11. Select the L Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.


12. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins
You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)


You can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in originals.
This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.

3
Important
• Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.
• Banner printing
• If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout

Note
• Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.
• Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents,
depending on the layout of images or text in your originals.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) →P.159

• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) →P.161

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins
(Windows)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on the
following example.
• Document: Any type
• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
• Paper: Roll 159
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

iPF8300 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins
Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

160

6. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").

7. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm).
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

9. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

10. Select the G No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.
11. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac
OS X)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on the
following example.
• Document: Any Type
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Plain Paper 161
• Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

iPF8300 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)
Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

162

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7. Access the Page Setup pane.

163

8. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.


9. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Width —in this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

iPF8300 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)
Enhanced Printing Options > Conserving roll paper >

10. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, ISO A4.

11. Select the K No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.


164 12. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals >

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals


Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals .................................................................................................. 165

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals


You can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots from web
browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.
This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a poster layout
for printing.
Important
• This function is only supported in Windows.
• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.
3
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows).") →P.193

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

165

iPF8300 Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals


Enhanced Printing Options > Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals >

4. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

5. Select the A Page Layout check box.


6. Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the A Page Layout list.
7. When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed. (At this point, the
document will not be printed yet.)

166

8. Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.


9. Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the PosterArtist window, repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple ap-
plications on the same page.

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals >

Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.

10. Print from the PosterArtist menu.

167

iPF8300 Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals


Enhanced Printing Options > Checking Images Before Printing >

Checking Images Before Printing


Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing .................................................................................... 168

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing


You can check the print layout on the preview screen.

Open Preview When Print Job Starts (Windows)


While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust orientation or other settings, and your changes will be instantly
applied on the preview screen.

Note
• Under some settings and in some environments, PageComposer may be started.

168

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Checking Images Before Printing >

Preview (Macintosh)
While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust layout or size settings, and your changes will be instantly applied
on the preview screen.

For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:
• Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows) →P.190

• Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X) →P.453

169

iPF8300 Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing


Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

Other useful settings


Printing With Watermarks .......................................................................................................................... 170
Printing with Watermarks— COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) ............................................... 171
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation ................................................................... 173
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) ............................................. 174
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) ........................................... 175
Using Favorites ......................................................................................................................................... 179
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing ............................................................................................................... 179
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) ......................................................................................... 179
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) ....................................................................................... 181

3 Printing With Watermarks


You can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.

Watermark
Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document.
Important
• Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.

The following watermarks are provided:


• CONFIDENTIAL
• COPY
• DRAFT
• FILE COPY
170 • FINAL
• PRELIMINARY
• PROOF
• TOP SECRET

You can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.
• Watermark string: Specify the font, size, color, and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame, if desired.
• Watermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.
• Watermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the document image.
You can also print the watermark only on the first page, if desired.

Printing With Watermarks iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

Note
• Watermarks are supported in Windows.
• In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks in Windows.

For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:
• Printing with Watermarks— COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) →P.171

Printing with Watermarks— COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)


This topic describes how to print with watermarks, based on the following example of printing with a FILE COPY
watermark.
• Document: Any type
• Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
• Paper: Roll paper 3
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in[)

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

171

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

iPF8300 Printing with Watermarks— COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)


Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

5. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.


Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Set-
tings.

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7. In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specified in the application software. In this case, click ISO A2.
8. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.
9. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).

172

Printing with Watermarks— COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

10. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

11. Select the C Watermark check box.


12. Click FILE COPY in the Watermarks list.
Note
• Click D Edit Watermark to open the Edit Watermark dialog box. In the Edit Watermark
dialog box, you can create custom watermarks and change the position and angle of watermarks.

13. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.


Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation


You can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.
173
Orientation
Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape orientation, you
can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.

iPF8300 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation


Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

Rotate 180 degrees


The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.

Mirror
A mirror image of the original is printed.

For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) →P.174
• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) →P.175

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows)


3 This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the
following example.
• Document: An original in landscape orientation
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
• Paper: Roll
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

174

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

5. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.


6. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").

9. In H Orientation, click J Landscape.


10. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.
11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
12. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "
175

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the
following example.
• Document: An original in landscape orientation
• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
• Paper: Roll paper
• Paper type: Plain Paper
• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

iPF8300 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X)
Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4. In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

176
5. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

6. Access the Main pane.

7. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
8. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
9. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.
10. Access the Page Setup pane.

177

11. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

iPF8300 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X)
Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

12. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3
(420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

13. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes
dialog box—in this case, ISO A4.

178

14. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) iPF8300
Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

Using Favorites
You can register print settings as Favorites to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations, or settings
for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly.

Favorites
Registering a favorite for later use. You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing, and you
can check the settings details.
Note
• You can also save the favorite settings as files. Using these files is a convenient way to print under the
same conditions on another computer. (In Windows.)

For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Using Favorites (Windows) →P.191 3
• Using Favorites (Mac OS X) →P.454

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing


Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.
Note
• It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper, such as adhesive paper. For details on types of paper
that cannot be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Types of Pa-
per →P.719 ")

Automatic Cutting
Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer, you can print continuously without cutting the roll, or you
can print a cut line.

For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and
operating system.
• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) →P.179

• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) →P.181

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)


This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as how to
179
print a cut line for manual cutting.
Note
• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed. Fol-
low the steps below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a cut
line instead.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) →P.193 ")

iPF8300 Using Favorites


Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

3. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

4. Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.


5. Click N Roll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.

6. To enable automatic cutting, click Yes in the A Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later
yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.

7. Click OK to close the Roll Paper Options dialog box.


8. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
180
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Windows) →P.189 "

Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)


This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as how to
print a cut line for manual cutting.
Note
• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed. Fol-
low the steps below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a cut
line instead.

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.
3

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

181
2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.
3. Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

iPF8300 Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)


Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

5. Access the Page Setup pane.

6. Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.


7. Access the Main pane.

182

8. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) iPF8300


Enhanced Printing Options > Other useful settings >

9. Click C Set to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.

10. To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the H Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the
paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.
Important
• If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on
the printer Control Panel.

11. Click OK to close the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.


12. Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) →P.452 "

183

iPF8300 Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)


Windows Software >

Windows Software
Printer Driver 185

Preview 228

Free Layout 241

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 269

Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional 283

Print Plug-In for Office 345

Status Monitor 392

Accounting 395
4 Digital Photo Front-Access 407

Device Setup Utility 408

Media Configuration Tool 412

184

iPF8300
Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Printer Driver
Printer Driver Settings .............................................................................................................................. 185
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ...................................................................................................... 187
Confirming Print Settings .......................................................................................................................... 189
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ................................................................................... 190
Using Favorites ........................................................................................................................................ 191
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications ...................................................................... 193
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu ............................................ 195
Main Sheet ............................................................................................................................................... 197
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 200
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 201
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application .......................................................................... 202
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color ............................................................................................................. 202
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color ..................................................................................................... 204
Matching Sheet .................................................................................................................................... 205
Ambient Light Adjust dialog box ............................................................................................................ 207
Light Source Check Tool ....................................................................................................................... 209
4
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome ................................................................................................ 210
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome ........................................................................................ 211
Gray Adjustment Sheet ........................................................................................................................ 212
Page Setup Sheet .................................................................................................................................... 213
Output Method dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 216
Paper Size Options Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 217
Layout Sheet ............................................................................................................................................ 218
Page Options Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 220
Special Settings Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 221
Favorites Sheet ........................................................................................................................................ 222
Utility Sheet .............................................................................................................................................. 224
Support Sheet .......................................................................................................................................... 225
Settings Summaries Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 226
Device Settings Sheet .............................................................................................................................. 226

Printer Driver Settings


For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver, refer to the following topics.
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications →P.193

• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu →P.195

185

iPF8300 Printer Driver Settings


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

• Main Sheet →P.197


You can specify the type of paper, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose Easy
Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more
detailed settings as desired.
• Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box →P.201

• View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application →P.202

• Color Adjustment Sheet: Color →P.202

• Object Adjustment dialog box: Color →P.204

• Matching Sheet →P.205

• Ambient Light Adjust dialog box →P.207

• Light Source Check Tool →P.209

• Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome →P.210

• Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome →P.211

• Gray Adjustment Sheet →P.212

• Page Setup Sheet →P.213


You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the
paper size and feed source, and automatic cutting.
186 • Output Method dialog box →P.216

• Paper Size Options Dialog Box →P.217

• Layout Sheet →P.218


You can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing options.
• Page Options Dialog Box →P.220

• Special Settings Dialog Box →P.221

• Favorites Sheet →P.222


Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved as a favorite. Favorites you have added can be edited
or used at the time of printing as desired.
• Utility Sheet →P.224
You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

Printer Driver Settings iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

• Support Sheet →P.225


You can view support information and the user manual.

• Device Settings Sheet →P.226


You can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the version information for the
printer driver.

imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a single
page as desired before printing. For details, see Free Layout →P.241 .
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals
from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy →P.269 .
Important
• Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and imagePROGRAF Free Layout cannot be used on 64-
bit version of Windows.

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver


If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
Important
• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.
187
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications →P.193 ")

iPF8300 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Note
• Click the B Get Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box.
On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the
printer and configure printer driver settings for the feed source and type of paper.
This function requires that the Status Monitor be installed.

5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

188

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

6. In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as specified in the application.
7. In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
8. If you have selected roll paper in L Paper Source, select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll Paper Width.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings →P.185 "

Confirming Print Settings


There are two ways to confirm the print settings, as follows.
• Checking a preview of the settings
• Checking a print preview
4
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, and Layout sheets. By checking illus-
trations and numerical values in the preview, you can confirm current settings for the page size, orientation, paper
source, layout, and so on.

189

Display Area Information Displayed

P Top illustrations Illustrations indicate the orientation, page layout, borderless printing selection,
color mode, and other settings information.
Q Middle, bordered area The page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduc-
tion are indicated.
R Bottom illustrations Illustrations indicate the feed source, orientation, borderless printing selection,
and other settings information.

iPF8300 Confirming Print Settings


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Note
• To confirm the Print Target specified in Easy Settings, click G View Settings on the Main sheet to
display the View Settings dialog box.

Checking a print preview


You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
When you activate this feature, imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer is started before printing. Confirming how
documents will be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see "Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing →P.168 "

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing


This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


4 2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications →P.193 ")

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

190

4. Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

5. After you click OK, when you print a job, the imagePROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.

4
Note
• If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and
clear Enable Preview Switching.

6. On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.
7. To print, click Print in the File menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview →P.228 .

Using Favorites
This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.

Registering a favorite
This section describes the procedure for registering printing settings that have been changed in the driver as Favorites.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


191
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (Refer to "Accessing the
Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications →P.193 ")

3. Perform normal printing settings.


The favorite is registered from here.

iPF8300 Using Favorites


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

4. Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

5. Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.

6. Enter a desired name in Name, such as Photos for Presentations or Monthly Report.

192
7. Choose a fitting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.
8. In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.
9. Click OK to close the Add dialog box.
The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites.
Note
• To save a favorite as a file, click J Export and specify the file to save.

Using Favorites iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Printing using the favorite


Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.(See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications →P.193 ")

3. Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

4. In the A Favorites, choose the favorite you registered.


Note
• To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite file.

5. Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.
6. Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
193
• For instructions on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings →P.189 "

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications

1. Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

iPF8300 Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

2. Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.
Note
• The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In
some cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for configuring the printer driver is added to the
dialog box.
In the following case, click Preferences.

• Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software

Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout, Favorites, Utility,
and Support.

194

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Note
• The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these six
sheets may be displayed.

Important
• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings
will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the
printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.
• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.
To use the settings continuously in all applications, open the printer driver from the system menu to
make the settings.
See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu →P.195 ".

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu

1. Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).


4
2. Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.

195

iPF8300 Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu
Windows Software > Printer Driver >

3. Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the name of this printer.

Note
• The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver.(See "Device Settings Sheet
→P.226 ")

Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout, Favorites, Utility,
and Support.

196

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu iPF8300
Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Important
• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the
settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.
• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.
See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications →P.193 ".

Main Sheet
The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help file.
Note
• On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the particular printing
application, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

Common Items

A Media Type
Select the type of paper.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.(See "Types of Pa-
per →P.719 ") 197

B Get Information
Displays Paper Information on Printer. You can update the printer driver settings for the feed source, media type, and
roll width by selecting the feed source.
• Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box →P.200

C Advanced Settings
Displays Paper Detailed Settings. You can configure the printing settings to match the type of media, such as the ink
drying time.
• Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box →P.201

iPF8300 Main Sheet


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

L Open Preview When Print Job Starts


If you turn this on, imagePROGRAF Preview starts before printing.
This allows you to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.
• Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing →P.168

M Status Monitor
Starts imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.
You can check the printer status, job status, and other conditions.
You can also set up email notification if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings.
For details, refer to the Status Monitor help file.

N About
Displays version information for the printer driver.

S Defaults
4 Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.

Configuration using Easy Settings

198
E Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
• Printing Photos and Images →P.17

• Printing Office Documents →P.33

Note
• Depending on the A Media Type setting, some E Print Target options may not be available.

F Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.

Main Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

• Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing →P.49

G View Settings
Displays the Print Target setting values.
You can view and change the order of Print Target setting values.
• View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application →P.202

Configuration using Advanced Settings

E Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
• Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing →P.49

F Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
• Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing →P.49

T High-Precision Photographs
199
Print with improved gradation and uniformity, particularly for high-precision photographs. However, this takes more
time than regular printing.
Note
• T High-Precision Photographs may not be selected depending on the A Media Type you select.
• T High-Precision Photographs and K High-Precision Text and Fine Lines cannot be checked at the
same time.
• To improve print quality, you may need to adjust the position of the printhead. (See "Enhancing Print-
ing Quality →P.784 ")

G Color Mode
Choose the color mode.

iPF8300 Main Sheet


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

• Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing →P.49

Note
• Depending on the A Media Type setting, some G Color Mode options may not be available.

H Color Settings
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.
• Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver →P.40

I Thicken Fine Lines


Activate this option to print fine lines more distinctly.

J Unidirectional Printing
Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality. However, the printing
speed becomes slower.
4
K High-Precision Text and Fine Lines
Print increasing ink impact accuracy, particularly for sharper text and fine lines. However, this takes more time than
regular printing.
Note
• K High-Precision Text and Fine Lines may not be selected depending on the A Media Type you se-
lect.
• To improve print quality, you may need to adjust the position of the printhead. (See "Enhancing Print-
ing Quality →P.784 ")

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box


On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and configure
printer driver settings for the paper source and media type.

200

Note
• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Get Information by
Media Type.(See "Main Sheet →P.197 ")

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

A Paper Source
Shows the paper source supported by the printer, as well as information about the loaded paper. To update the paper
source and media type settings in the printer driver, select the desired Paper Source option and click OK.

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box


The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.

Note
• To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Settings by Media Type.
(See "Main Sheet →P.197 ")

A Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying Time setting is only valid for rolls.
• (See "Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls →P.741 ")

B Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper, as needed.

C Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.
201
D Roll Paper Margin for Safety
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held
firmly against the Platen.

E Near End Margin


Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.

F Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic
cutting is used.

iPF8300 Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

H Calibration Value
You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the printer to image processing.

G Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with
the left and right sides inverted.

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application


In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.

Note
• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click View Settings by Print Target.(See
"Main Sheet →P.197 ")

A Print Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).

B Name
202 Identifies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

C Details
Here, you can confirm detailed settings values for each listed item for the selected Print Target.

Color Adjustment Sheet: Color


If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Note
• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings.(See "Main Sheet →P.197 ")

A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.

B View Color Pattern


Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

C Apply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow


Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.

G Gray Tone
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue) or Warm Black (tinged with red).
203
H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker
than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer
screen).

I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes
images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

iPF8300 Color Adjustment Sheet: Color


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

J Saturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Satu-
ration makes colors more subdued.

K Object Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color ad-
justment.
• Object Adjustment dialog box: Color →P.204

S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Note
• For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver →P.40 "

4
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an origi-
nal comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment
sheet.

A Image
204
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

Object Adjustment dialog box: Color iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Matching Sheet
On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on
various devices.
Note
• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings in Color Mode in Advanced
Settings, and then click the Matching sheet. (Refer to "Main Sheet →P.197 ")

Important
• If No color correction is selected under Color Mode, the Matching sheet is not displayed.

Driver Matching Mode


The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the A Matching Mode list.

A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
Normally, select Driver Matching Mode. For color matching based on ICC profiles, select ICC Matching Mode,
Driver ICM Mode, or Host ICM Mode, depending on your color matching system.

B Matching Method 205


Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various Matching Method options are availa-
ble depending on your selection in Matching Mode.

C Color Space
Select the applicable color space as desired.

D Monitor White Point


Enter the color temperature set on the monitor.
Displayed when the B Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching.

iPF8300 Matching Sheet


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

E Use ambient light adjustment


Select this option for adjustment of colors to suit the ambient light in the viewing environment.

F Ambient Light Adjust


Click to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box, which enables you to complete settings for printing to match
the ambient light.
• Ambient Light Adjust dialog box →P.207

ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode and Host ICM Mode
The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode, or Host ICM Mode in
the A Matching Mode list.

A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

B Input Profile Settings


You can select Image, Graphics, or Text. You can choose Matching Method and Input Profile.
Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode.
206 To apply the same input profile automatically for Graphics and Text, select Use the Same Profile for All Objects. To
apply separate input profiles to Graphics and Text, clear Use the Same Profile for All Objects and specify the indi-
vidual settings.

C Printer Profile Settings


Specify the printer profile as desired. Normally, select Auto Settings.
Note
• For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver →P.40 "

Matching Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Ambient Light Adjust dialog box


The Ambient Light Adjust dialog box is used to select the setting method and to enter and select the information re-
quired for the settings.

When you select By selecting a chart number in Setting Method

A Setting Method
You can choose configuration based on the printed Chart or based on using the i1 colorimeter.

B Print Chart
Click to start the Light Source Check Tool, for printing Chart. The Light Source Check Tool must be installed to use
this function.
• Light Source Check Tool →P.209

C Chart Number
In Chart, select the number of the pattern with your desired colors.

D Color Temperature
Enter the D Color Temperature measured during monitor calibration. Displayed when the A Matching Method is set
to Monitor Matching on the Matching sheet.

E Illuminance
Enter the E Illuminance measured during monitor calibration. Displayed when the A Matching Method is set to
Monitor Matching on the Matching sheet. 207

iPF8300 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

When you select By entering values directly in Setting Method

A Setting Method
4 You can choose configuration based on the printed Chart or based on using the i1 colorimeter.

B Lighting Source Type


Select the light source measured using the i1 colorimeter.

D Color Temperature
Enter the Color Temperature measured using the i1 colorimeter.

E Illuminance
Enter the Illuminance measured using the i1 colorimeter.
Displayed when the A Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching sheet.

Note
• For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver →P.40 "

208

Ambient Light Adjust dialog box iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Light Source Check Tool


The Light Source Check Tool enables you to print Chart.

A Printer Name
The printer name is displayed here.

B Media Type
Select the paper type. For information on the types of paper compatible with Driver Matching Mode, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide.(See "Types of Paper →P.719 ")

C Paper Source
Choose the paper source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in B Media Type in the Main sheet.

D Print
Click to print the Chart.
209

iPF8300 Light Source Check Tool


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome


On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Note
• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings.(See "Main Sheet →P.197 ")

A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.

B View Color Pattern


Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

C Apply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow


Not available.
210
G Gray Tone
Not available.

H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker
than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer
screen).

I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes
images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

J Saturation
Not available.

K Object Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color ad-
justment.
• Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome →P.211

S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Note
• For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver →P.40 "

Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome 4


In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an origi-
nal comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment
sheet.

A Image
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos. 211

B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

iPF8300 Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Gray Adjustment Sheet


The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment sheet.

Gray Adjustment
On the Gray Adjustment sheet, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image qualities.

Note
• To display the Gray Adjustment sheet, on theMain Sheet →P.197 , select Monochrome (Photo) by
Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Color Settings.
• Monochrome (Photo) is not available for all types of paper.

A Sample Type
The image at left is updated to reflect any changes you make to setting items on the sheet, enabling you to check the
results of adjustment.

B Sample List
Select a sample image, as desired.

212
C Color Balance
Click the list to select a color balance that suits the printing application.

DX / EY
Adjust the color balance as you check the color tone in the adjustment area.
You can adjust the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it.
Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment, as desired.
You can click the arrows by the D X (horizontal) and E Y (vertical) boxes or enter the values directly.

Gray Adjustment Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker
than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer
screen).

G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the G Contrast
makes images sharper, and reducing the G Contrast softens images.

H Highlight
Adjust the brightness of the lightest portion.

I Shadow
Adjust the brightness of the darkest portion.

S Defaults 4
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

Page Setup Sheet


The following settings are available on the Page Setup sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver
help file.

213

A Page Size
Select the page size as specified in the source application.
For details on available page sizes, see "Paper Sizes →P.722 "

iPF8300 Page Setup Sheet


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

B Borderless Printing

Borderless printing is available if roll paper is selected in the L Paper Source list. Choose from the following options
when this setting is activated.
• Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size →P.90

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width →P.97


• Borderless Printing at Actual Size →P.83

4 D Fit Paper Size


Scales the document image to match the paper size.

E Scale to fit Roll Paper Width


Scales the document image to match the roll width.

F Print Image with Actual Size


Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available when you have selected the size same as the width of
Roll Paper for either the length or width of the document from the A Page Size list.

G Paper Size
Available when D Fit Paper Size is selected.
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see "Paper Sizes →P.722 "
Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.

C Enlarged/Reduced Printing

214

Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.


• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size →P.58

• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width →P.64

• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value →P.69

D Fit Paper Size


Scales the document image to match the paper size.

Page Setup Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

E Fit Roll Paper Width


Scales the document image to match the roll width.

F Scaling
Resizes the document image based on a specified scaling value. Enter a value in a range of 5–600.

G Paper Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see "Paper Sizes →P.722 "

H Orientation
Choose the printing orientation.
• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation →P.173

K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)


Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.
4
• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees →P.154

L Paper Source
Choose the feed source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type on the Main sheet.

M Roll Paper Width


Choose the roll width.
For details on available roll widths, see "Paper Sizes →P.722 "

N Roll Paper Options


Complete optional roll paper settings. Click to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.

Under A Automatic Cutting, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline. 215
• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing →P.179

Select B Banner Printing when printing multiple pages continuously.


• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously →P.126

P Output Method
Click to display the Output Method dialog box, which enables you to complete the Output Method and Name of
data to be saved settings.
• Output Method dialog box →P.216

iPF8300 Page Setup Sheet


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

O Size Options
Click to display the Paper Size Options dialog box, which enables you to register additional paper sizes or select the
size system for use.
• Paper Size Options Dialog Box →P.217

S Defaults
Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.

Output Method dialog box


The Output Method dialog box allows you to select the Output Method and set the save settings when saving to the
box.

Note
• To display the Output Method dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Output Method. (Refer to
"Page Setup Sheet →P.213 ")
216
A Output Method
If Print is selected, the print job is saved to the printer hard disk after printing has finished.
If Save in mail box is selected, the print job is saved to the printer hard disk. If you choose Save in mail box, also
specify the destination personal box in the Mail box list.
If Print after reception is complete is checked, the print job is first saved completely on the printer hard disk before
printing begins.
These can be selected as Print options.

B Name of data to be saved


To use the file name, choose Use file name.
Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name.

Output Method dialog box iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

C Mail box
Displays a list of mail boxes. If you choose Save in mail box, also specify the destination personal box from the list.

D Acquire Mail Box Name


When this is clicked, the box name acquired from the printer main unit is displayed in Mail box.

Paper Size Options Dialog Box


In the Paper Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Paper Size. The sizes you define
are listed with standard paper sizes for selection later as needed.

Note
• To display the Paper Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Paper Size Options.(See
"Page Setup Sheet →P.213 ")

A Paper Size List


Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer driver.

B Delete
Custom paper sizes created by users can be deleted from the A Paper Size List, as needed.
However, they cannot be deleted in the following situations.
• If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected. 217
• If an oversized paper size is selected.
• If a paper size marked with a red circle is selected.

C Custom Paper Size Name


You can name Custom Paper Size as desired.

D Units
Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper Size height and width.

iPF8300 Paper Size Options Dialog Box


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

E Paper Size
Specify the desired Width and Height. You can make your selection from sizes that are compatible with Borderless
Printing by selecting Borderless Printing Size. To maintain the aspect ratio of the Width and Height as you resize the
paper, select Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height.

F Add
Enables you to register the custom paper size you have specified or overwrite an existing custom paper size.

G Display Series
You can limit the number of options shown in Page Size, Paper Size, and Paper Size List.

Layout Sheet
The following settings are available on the Layout sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

A Page Layout
Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.

218 • Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet →P.131

• Printing Posters in Sections →P.138

• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other →P.121

• Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals →P.165

B Set
Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in A Page Layout. In these dialog boxes,
you can specify layout details and which pages to print, as well as other settings.
• Page Layout Printing
• Pages to Print
• Free Layout Settings

Layout Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

C Watermark
Activating this option makes two settings available, Watermarks and D Edit Watermark.
• Printing With Watermarks →P.170

Watermarks
Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.

D Edit Watermark
Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original watermark.

E Print Centered
Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.
• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls →P.142

• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets →P.148


4
F Rotate 180 degrees
Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.

G No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)


Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which
enables you to conserve the paper.
• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins →P.159

H Copies
Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of 1–999.

Reverse Order
Activate this option to print pages in reverse order.

I Page Options
Click to display the Page Options dialog box, which enables you to complete settings for printing the user name, date,
or page number in the header or footer.
• Page Options Dialog Box →P.220

J Special Settings
219
If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to change how printing is processed.
• Special Settings Dialog Box →P.221

S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

iPF8300 Layout Sheet


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Page Options Dialog Box


The Page Options dialog box offers the following settings.

4 Note
• To display the Page Options dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Page Options.(See "Layout Sheet
→P.218 ")

A Print Date
Select where the date is printed, as desired. To print the time as well, select B Print Time Also.

C Print User Name


Select where the user name is printed, as desired.

D Print Page Number


Select where the page number is printed, as desired.

E Format Settings
Click to display the Format Settings dialog box, which enables you to complete format-related settings.

220

Note
• If you specify the same position for multiple items, the items are printed from left to right in this order:
date, user name, and page number.
• When you print multiple pages per sheet using Page Layout Printing or similar functions, these items
will be printed for each page.

Page Options Dialog Box iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Special Settings Dialog Box


If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special Settings dialog
box.

Note 4
• To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Special Settings.(See "Layout
Sheet →P.218 ")

A FineZoom Settings
This function is used in large-format printing. Normally, choose Auto. If documents are not printed correctly on large-
format paper, it may help to select Yes, and if fine lines are not visible or if images are distorted when printed, it may
help to select No.

B Application Color Matching Priority


You can give applications priority in color management.

C Enable Preview Switching


When this option is selected, PageComposer starts if you print with Open Preview When Print Job Starts selected on
the Main sheet.

D Fast Graphic Process


If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses, clearing this option
may help produce the expected results.
Important
• This function cannot be used on 64-bit version of Windows.
221

iPF8300 Special Settings Dialog Box


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Favorites Sheet
The following settings are available on the Favorites sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

A Favorites
Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings favorites.
• Using Favorites →P.179

B Settings Details
Displays details of the favorite selected in the A Favorites.

C Comment
Displays notes registered in the favorite.

D Apply Favorite
Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite selected in the A Favorites.

E Application Settings Priority


222
Activate this setting to use settings values specified in the source application in preference to favorite settings selected
in the A Favorites, when clicking D Apply Favorite. For details on the settings items used in preference, refer to the
printer driver help.

F Delete
Click to delete the selected favorite from the A Favorites list.

G Edit
Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the name and icon for the favorite selected in the
A Favorites list.

Favorites Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

H Add
Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the current print settings as a favorite.

I Import 4
Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import favorite settings saved as a file.

J Export
Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the favorite settings as a file.

K Up
Click to move the selected favorite up in the A Favorites list.

L Down
Click to move the selected favorite down in the A Favorites list.

223

iPF8300 Favorites Sheet


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Utility Sheet
The following items can be executed on the Utility sheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant utility help.

A Maintenance
Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
• Head alignment adjustment
• Feed amount adjustment

B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy


Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy), which enables you to create hot fold-
ers used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders.
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER →P.281

For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy →P.269 .

224

Utility Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Support Sheet
On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user's manual.

A Support Information
Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can find the latest information on the printer and consumables,
check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.

B User Manual
Click to view the printer user's manual. This function requires the user's manual to be installed on your computer.

C Settings Summaries
Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to confirm the settings for the Main, Page Setup,
Layout, and Favorites sheets.

225

iPF8300 Support Sheet


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

Settings Summaries Dialog Box


The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to confirm the settings for the Main, Page Setup, Layout, and Fa-
vorites sheets.

A Copy
Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard. You can paste the settings information into a file created with a
text editor or similar application.

Device Settings Sheet


Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However, the Device Set-
tings sheet is for configuring the printer, and it is an extension of the printer driver.
The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.

226

Settings Summaries Dialog Box iPF8300


Windows Software > Printer Driver >

A About
You can display version information for the printer driver.

227

iPF8300 Device Settings Sheet


Windows Software > Preview >

Preview
The Features of Preview ........................................................................................................................... 228
Operating Environment ............................................................................................................................. 228
Starting Preview ........................................................................................................................................ 228
Preview Main Window ............................................................................................................................... 230
Dialog Area ................................................................................................................................................ 233
Enlarge/Reduce the screen display ........................................................................................................... 234
Moving a Page .......................................................................................................................................... 234
Using the ruler ........................................................................................................................................... 235
Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees ...................................................................................................... 235
Printing with Selecting the Layout ............................................................................................................. 237
Print on the Center .................................................................................................................................... 239
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom .......................................................................................................... 240

4 The Features of Preview


The main features of Preview are as follows.
• While viewing this screen, you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software.
• You can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen, and
you can print the preview screen as it is seen.
Note
• The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print
output to differ from the Preview settings.

Operating Environment
You can use the Preview in the following environments.
• Compatible Operating System
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7

• Software that requires installation


imagePROGRAF Printer Driver

Starting Preview
Follow the procedure below to start the Preview.
228
1. Start the apllication software which you use.
2. From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

The Features of Preview iPF8300


Windows Software > Preview >

3. On the Main sheet, click on the Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.
Click the OK button to save the settings.

Note
• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

4. On the Print dialog box in the apllication software, click the Print button.
5. Preview main window is displayed.

229

iPF8300 Starting Preview


Windows Software > Preview >

Preview Main Window


The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars, preview and dialog area and status bar.

Note
• You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar.

Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.

Tool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

230

Preview Main Window iPF8300


Windows Software > Preview >

Preview Area
You can check the settings you made in this area.

Dialog Area
This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job.

231

iPF8300 Preview Main Window


Windows Software > Preview >

For more information about Dialog Area, see "Dialog Area." →P.233

Status Bar
This shows the message, Pages and Output Size.

232

Preview Main Window iPF8300


Windows Software > Preview >

Dialog Area
You can select the layout and print on the center.

Media Type / Paper Source /Paper Size


You can confirm the information that is set.

Layout Selection
You can print which conserves paper by selecting the layout.
For more information about Layout Selection, see "Printing with Selecting the Layout." →P.237
233
Center Originals Across Roll
You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.
For more information about Center Originals Across Roll, see "Print on the Center." →P.239

Note
• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

No Spaces at Top or Bottom


You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or
bottom.
For more information about No Spaces at Top or Bottom, see "Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom." →P.240

iPF8300 Dialog Area


Windows Software > Preview >

Note
• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

Print Button
Click the button to start printing.

Cancel Button
Click the button to stop printing.

Printer Information
You can confirm the information acquired from the printer.

Update Printer Information Button


4 Click the button to update the printer information with connecting to the printer.

Status Monitor Button


Click the button to start Status Monitor.

Enlarge/Reduce the screen display


You can enlarge or reduce the screen display when you select Zoom from the View menu.

Setting Details
Fit Screen Display all.
Fit to Width Display to the width of the paper.
Reduce Display at half of the standard size.
Standard Display at the standard size.
Enlarge Display with the double of the standard size.
Enlarge More Display with the triple of the standard size.

Note
• This item can be selected even if you have clicked the ▼ button in the toolbar Zoom.

234

Moving a Page
You can move a page to display when you select Go to Page from the View menu.

Setting Details
First Page Go to the first page.
Previous Page Go to the previous page.
Next Page Go to the next page.
Last Page Go to the last page.
Go To Page Go to the specified page.

Enlarge/Reduce the screen display iPF8300


Windows Software > Preview >

Note

• You can also move a page by clicking on the tool bar.

Using the ruler


You can confirm the layout with using the ruler.
• Switching the ruler Show/Hide
In the View menu, select Ruler to switch the ruler Show/Hide.

• Changing the ruler unit


You can set the ruler unit when you select Units from the View menu.

Setting Details
mm Use mm as the ruler unit.
inch Use inches as the ruler unit.
4

Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees


You can select Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Use Driver Settings from the Options menu.

Setting Details
Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible Rotates pages in portrait orientation 90 degrees before printing. Pages are only
rotated if they can fit lengthwise across the roll.
Use Driver Settings Follows printer driver settings when determining whether to rotate pages.

Selecting Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Placing a checkmark for Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) on the
printer driver

235

iPF8300 Using the ruler


Windows Software > Preview >

Selecting Use Driver Settings

236

Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees iPF8300


Windows Software > Preview >

Printing with Selecting the Layout


You can print which conserves paper by selecting the layout.

1. In Layout Selection, click the layout button to use.

Button Details
Upper Button

Turn at the position of .


Right Button 237

Turn at the position of .


Left Button

Turn at the position of .


Lower Button

Turn at the position of .

iPF8300 Printing with Selecting the Layout


Windows Software > Preview >

Note
• Right Button or Left Button can be selected only when the rotated pages can fit lengthwise
across the roll.
• By clicking Right Button or Left Button, you can save paper by printing in landscape orienta-
tion on roll paper.
• You can select only Upper Button or Lower Button if Cut Sheet is selected.

Button Details
The button is selected currently.

The button can be selected.

The button can not be selected.

2. Click the Print Button.


Printing on the selected layout begins.

238

Printing with Selecting the Layout iPF8300


Windows Software > Preview >

Print on the Center


You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.

1. Click the Center Originals Across Roll check box on.

2. Click the Print button


Printing on the center begins.
Note
• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
239

iPF8300 Print on the Center


Windows Software > Preview >

Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom


You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or
bottom.

1. Click the No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box on.

2. Click the Print button.


Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins.

240

Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Free Layout
The Features of Free Layout ..................................................................................................................... 241
Operating Environment ............................................................................................................................. 242
Starting Free Layout .................................................................................................................................. 242
Free Layout Main Window ......................................................................................................................... 244
Detailed Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 246
Preferences Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................. 247
Page Options Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 248
Zoom Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................... 249
Format Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................................... 250
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page ................................................................................... 252
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page ................................. 254
Selecting an Object ................................................................................................................................... 257
Changing the Object Size .......................................................................................................................... 258
Moving an Object ...................................................................................................................................... 259
Rotating an Object ..................................................................................................................................... 259
Laying out Objects Automatically .............................................................................................................. 260 4
Aligning Objects ........................................................................................................................................ 260
Changing the Object Overlapping Order ................................................................................................... 263
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ................................................................................................................. 264
Folded Duplex Window ............................................................................................................................. 265
Finished Size Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 266
Binding Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................... 267
Prints using Folded Duplex ....................................................................................................................... 268

The Features of Free Layout


The main features of Free Layout are as follows.
• Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software.
• You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple-file document on one
page, or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.
• Any two pages can be arranged and printed in a layout that becomes duplex on folding.
This can be used such as for advertising posters that are suspended from the ceiling.

241

Note
• The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print
output to differ from the Free Layout settings.

iPF8300 The Features of Free Layout


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Operating Environment
You can use the Free Layout in the following environments.
• Compatible Operating System
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7
• Software that requires installation
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
Note
• This function is not available on 64-bit version of Windows.

Starting Free Layout


Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout.

4
1. Start the apllication software which you use.
2. From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

3. From the list, select the printer and select the Layout sheet.

242

Note
• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

Operating Environment iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

4. In the Layout sheet, click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list.
Click the OK button to save the settings.
Note
• When you select Free Layout, all other setting items will be disabled.

5. On the Print dialog box in the apllication software, click the Print button.
Free Layout main window is displayed.

243

iPF8300 Starting Free Layout


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Free Layout Main Window


The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and status bar.

Note
• You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool and status bar.

Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.

Tool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

244

Free Layout Main Window iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Layout Area
This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation.

Status Bar
This shows the paper size, unit of length, and number of objects.

245

iPF8300 Free Layout Main Window


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Detailed Settings
The printer driver opens when you select Detailed Settings from the File menu. The printer driver is used to configure
basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer.

Refer to Printer Driver →P.185 for details on the printer driver.


Note
• When you select the Detailed Settings, the only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet, the Page Set-
up sheet, and the Layout sheet. Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled.

246

Detailed Settings iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Preferences Dialog Box


This dialog box appears when you select Preferences from the File menu. This allows you to configure the preferences
of Free Layout.

Units
Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.

Gridlines
You can input a grid line width value in numerical characters so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.
Note
• You can input between 10.0 and 200.0(mm) (between 0.39 and 7.88(inch)).
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

Divisions
You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.
Note
• You can input between 1 and 10.
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

Grid Color
247
Select the grid line color.

Auto Arrange Spacing


Change the object-to-object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically.
Note
• You can input between 0.0 and 100.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 3.94(inch)).
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

iPF8300 Preferences Dialog Box


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Object Frame Style


You can select the object frame style for printing.
The following settings are available for the object frame style.

Setting Details
None You can print with no frame style.
Solid Line You can print the solid line as the frame style.
Dotted Line You can print the dotted line as the frame style.
Dashed Line You can print the dashed line as the frame style.
Crop Marks You can print with the crop marks.

Page Options Dialog Box


This dialog box appears when you select Page Options from the File menu. This allows you to configure the roll paper
length, object layout order, and margins of Free Layout.
4

Roll Paper Length


248 Set the length of one page to print on roll paper.
The following settings are available for roll paper length.

Setting Details
Auto Settings The one-page length to be printed on roll paper is automatically set so that the
laid-out objects are printed on one page.
Manual Settings You can input the length of one page to print on roll paper in numerical charac-
ters.

Page Options Dialog Box iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Note
• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
• You can input between 203.2 and 18000.0(mm) (between 8.00 and 708.66(inch)).
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

Order
Set the object layout order.
The following settings are available for order.

Setting Details
Upper Left to Right The objects are laid out from upper left to right.
Upper Left to Bottom The objects are laid out from upper left to bottom.
Upper Right to Left The objects are laid out from upper right to left.
Lower Left to Top The objects are laid out from lower left to top.

Note 4
• When you have selected Roll Paper Length > Auto Settings and Paper Orientation > Vertical, you
can choose Upper Left to Right or Upper Right to Left.
• When you have selected Roll Paper Length > Auto Settings and Paper Orientation > Horizontal, you
can choose Upper Left to Bottom or Lower Left to Top.

Margins
You can input the paper margins in numerical characters.
Note
• You can input between 0.0 and 50.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 1.97(inch)).
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

Zoom Dialog Box


This dialog box appears when you select Zoom from the View menu. You can enlarge or reduce the screen display.

249
Scaling
Set the magnification for enlargement or reduction of the screen display.
Note
• You can input between 25 and 400.
• You can change the numbers by clicking ▼ button.

iPF8300 Zoom Dialog Box


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Format Dialog Box


This dialog box appears when you select Format from the Object menu after you select an object.

Size Sheet
You can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.

Note
• When the objects are not selected, you can not select Format.

Rotate
When you place a checkmark here, you can select Rotate Right or Rotate Left.

Setting Details
Rotate Right Rotates the object 90 degrees clockwise.
Rotate Left Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise.

Note
250 • When several objects are selected, you cannot select Rotate.

Enl./Red.
When you place a checkmark here, you can select Scaling, Fit Paper Size, or Fit Photo Size.

Setting Details
Scaling Allows you to input the value of the enlargement or reduction ratio of an object.
Fit Paper Size Prints by enlarging or reducing each object to match the paper size. If you are
using roll paper, objects are enlarged or reduced so that the width of each object
matches the width of the roll paper.
Fit Photo Size Prints all of the objects at the specified photo size.

Format Dialog Box iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Note
• You can input between 25 and 600.
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

Position Sheet
You can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.

Note
• When the objects are not selected, you can not select Format.

Object Position
You can move the object position by changing the values.

Setting Details
Vertical Pos You can input the number of the vertical position in numerical characters.
Horizontal Pos You can input the number of the horizontal position in numerical characters.
Page Pos You can input the number of the page position in numerical characters.
251
Object Size
You can confirm the object size.
Note
• When several objects are selected, you cannot display Object Size.

iPF8300 Format Dialog Box


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page


You can lay out and print a multiple-file document on one page.

1. From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

2. Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box.

3. In the Page Setup sheet, select Paper Source.

252

Note
• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

4. In the Layout sheet, click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list.

Note
• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.
• When you select Free Layout, all other setting items will be disabled.

5. Click the OK button to save the settings.


6. In the Print dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the OK button.

253

iPF8300 Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.

7. Leaving Free Layout running, open other files with the application software and repeat the above steps.

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
You can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.

1. From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

254

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page iPF8300
Windows Software > Free Layout >

2. Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box.

3. In the Page Setup sheet, select Paper Source.

255
Note
• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

iPF8300 Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
Windows Software > Free Layout >

4. In the Layout sheet, click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list.

Note
• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.
• When you select Free Layout, all other setting items will be disabled.

5. Click the OK button to save the settings.


6. In the Print dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the OK button.

256

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page iPF8300
Windows Software > Free Layout >

Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.

7. Leaving Free Layout running, open other files with other application software and repeat the above steps.

Selecting an Object
When an object is selected, a select box (blue border) appears around the object.

257

iPF8300 Selecting an Object


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Note
• To select an object, click that object.
• To select multiple successive objects, click them while holding down the Shift key.
• To select multiple arbitrary objects, click them while holding down the Ctrl key.
• To select all objects, select Select All from the Edit menu.
• When you specify the area with dragging the mouse, the object in the area is selected.

Changing the Object Size


You can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value.
Note
• The vertical-to-horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced.

Resizing by means of mouse operation

1. Select an object.
2. Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box around the object to show the arrow handle, and drag this han-
dle to change the object size.

258

Resizing by specifying a scaling value

1. Select an object.
Click on the Enl./Red. checkbox in the Format Dialog Box →P.250 and select Scaling.

Changing the Object Size iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

2. You either enter numbers directly.


Note
• You can input between 25 and 600.
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

3. Click the OK button.

Moving an Object
You can move the object position.

1. Select an object.
2. Place the pointer inside the selection box of the object to show the crosshair handle, and drag it to move the
object.
Alternatively, you can move the Object Position by changing the values in Vertical Pos, Horizontal Pos and
4
Page Pos in the Format Dialog Box →P.250 .

Rotating an Object
You can rotate the object.

1. Select an object.
259

iPF8300 Moving an Object


Windows Software > Free Layout >

2. Select Rotate Left 90 Degrees or Rotate Right 90 Degrees from the toolbar.
Alternatively, you may click on the Rotate check box in the Format Dialog Box →P.250 then select Rotate
Right or Rotate Left, and click the OK button.

4
Laying out Objects Automatically
Click Auto Arrange Object in the tool bar. This automatically lays out objects. Alternatively, you may select Auto
Arrange Object from the Object menu.

Note
• The object layout order varies depending on the Order setting in the Page Options Dialog
Box →P.248 dialog box.

260
Aligning Objects
You can align objects systematically.

1. Select multiple objects.


2. Click the align button from the toolbar.
Alternatively, you may select the align menu from the Object menu.

Laying out Objects Automatically iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Align Top
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the top.

Center Vertically 4
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the vertical center.

Align Bottom
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the bottom.

261

iPF8300 Aligning Objects


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Align Left
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the left.

4 Center Horizontally
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the horizontal center.

Align Right
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the right.

262

Aligning Objects iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Changing the Object Overlapping Order


You can change the object overlapping order.

1. Select an object.
2. Select the Overlapping Order menu from the Object menu.
Note
• The order of overlapping affects the order of objects automatically laid out.
• You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object.

Bring to Front
Moves the object to the frontmost position.

Send to Back
Moves the object to the backmost position.

263

iPF8300 Changing the Object Overlapping Order


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Bring Forward
Moves the object one position to the front.

4 Send Backward
Moves the object one position to the back.

Pasting a Copied or Cut Object

1. Click Copy or Cut from the toolbar.


Alternatively, you may select Copy or Cut from the Edit menu.

264
2. Click Paste from the toolbar.
Alternatively, you may select Paste from the Edit menu.
Note
• The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page.
• You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object.
• In order to paste an object on any position that you like, you can paste the object with Pointed Paste by
clicking the right button of the mouse on any position that you want.

Pasting a Copied or Cut Object iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Folded Duplex Window


This window is displayed if you select Folded Duplex from the Edit menu after selecting an object. Using the Folded
Duplex function allows you to print with fold lines added.
The Folded Duplex window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and status bar.

Note
• The toolbar and status bar can be toggled between hidden and displayed from the View menu.

Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.

Tool Bar
265
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

iPF8300 Folded Duplex Window


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Layout Area
This allows you to check the arrangement and orientation of objects.

Status Bar
This shows the paper source, roll paper width, and output size.

Finished Size Settings Dialog Box


This dialog box is displayed when you select Finished Size Settings from the Edit menu. This allows you to configure
finished size settings.

266

Finished Size
Selects the method for setting the finished size.
The following settings are available for the finished size.

Finished Size Settings Dialog Box iPF8300


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Setting Details
Fit Roll Paper Width Prints by automatically enlarging or reducing the entire document so that the
width of the document matches the roll paper width.
Specify Folded Size Prints by automatically enlarging or reducing the entire document to match the
size of the paper. Select the actual size of the paper you want to print on in Fit
Paper Size.
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Con- Prints by rotating pages by 90 degrees. Pages are automatically rotated if they
serve Paper) will fit within the roll paper width when rotated, and are not rotated if they will
not fit within the roll paper width.

Binding Settings Dialog Box


This is displayed when you select Binding Settings from the Edit menu. This allows you to configure the binding edge
settings.

Binding Edge
Configures the binding edge when folding paper.
The following settings are available for the binding edge.

Setting Details
Bottom Prints by placing the binding margin (gutter) at the bottom of the document.
Top Prints by placing the binding margin (gutter) at the top of the document.

Binding 267
Configures the binding margin (gutter).
Prints by creating a binding margin (gutter) of the specified size. Enter the margin size as a number.
Note
• The values that can be entered are 0 to 50 (mm).

Print Fold Lines


Configures the color and type of fold lines.
Note
• To not print fold lines, clear the Print Fold Lines checkbox.

iPF8300 Binding Settings Dialog Box


Windows Software > Free Layout >

Fold Line Color


You can select the fold lines.

Fold Line Type


You can select the fold lines.
The following settings are available for the fold line type.

Setting Details
Solid Line You can print the solid line as the frame style.
Dotted Line You can print the dotted line as the frame style.
Dashed Line You can print the dashed line as the frame style.

Only Print Center and Edges


To print fold lines at the center and both edges, select the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox.

4
Prints using Folded Duplex
Allows you to produce duplex printing by combining two pages and folding them.

1. Select two objects from the layout area of Free Layout.


2. Select Folded Duplex from the Edit menu of Free Layout.
Open the Folded Duplex window and arrange the selected objects in the layout area.

3. Open the Finished Size Settings dialog box from the Edit menu.
4. Select Fit Roll Paper Width or Specify Folded Size in Finished Size.
Note
• Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) is also available when Specify Folded Size is selec-
ted.

5. Click OK to save the settings.


6. Open the Binding Settings dialog box from the Edit menu.
7. Select Bottom or Top in Binding Edge.
268
8. Specify the Binding width in Binding.
9. Configure the Fold Line Color and Fold Line Type from Print Fold Lines.
Note
• When the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox is selected, fold lines are only printed at the
three locations of the center and both edges.

10. Click OK to save the settings.


11. Confirm the print setting and begin printing.
Prints using Folded Duplex iPF8300
Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy


The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ...................................................................... 269
Operating Environment ............................................................................................................................. 269
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ................................................................................... 269
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box .............................................................................. 271
Hot Folder .................................................................................................................................................. 272
Creating a New Hot Folder ........................................................................................................................ 273
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder .............................................................................. 277
Setting the Print Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 280
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER .............................................. 281

The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy


The main features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy are as follows.
• Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed. 4
• You can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection, media type and output profile selection, and
matching methods, in addition to borderless printing and enlargement/reduction process without growing through
the printer driver.
Note
• The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print
output to differ from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings.

Operating Environment
You can use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy in the following environments.
• Compatible Operating System
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7

• Software that requires installation


imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
Note
• This function is not available on 64-bit version of Windows.

Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 269


Follow the procedure below to start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

To start by selecting Printers and Faxes from the start button

1. Open the folder of the OS you are using for configuring printers.
For example, on Windows XP click the start button on the desktop, and then select Printers and Faxes.

iPF8300 The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

2. Right-click the Printers icon and select Printing Preferences to open the Printing Preferences dialog box.
In the Utility sheet, click the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy button.

3. The Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box displays.

Note
270 • If you click on the Add to Startup folder check box in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
dialog box, the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the task bar when
starting Windows thereafter.

To start by selecting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy from the start button

1. From the Windows start button, select Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

2. The Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box displays.

4
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
The explanation below is on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box.

Note
• For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, see "Starting Color im-
ageRUNNER Enlargement Copy." →P.269

Hot Folder 271


The hot folder list appears.

Add Button
Click the button to open the Easy Setup Wizard dialog box so that you can add a hot folder.

Edit Button
From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the button to open the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box that
allows you to edit the hot folder.

iPF8300 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

Delete Button
From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the button to delete the hot folder.

Start Button
Clicking the button changes the status of the selected inactive Hot Folder to active.

Stop Button
Clicking the button changes the status of the selected active Hot Folder to inactive.

Add to Startup folder


Register the application in the Windows startup menu.

Save Printed Data

4 Automatically saves printed data.

About Button
Click the button to display the name and the version number of the utility.

Operation Guide Button


Click the button to display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual.

Hot Folder
Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
• When transferred to the PC's hot folder, the document data scanned with the Color imageRUNNER is printed in
enlarged size from the printer according to the print conditions set in the hot folder.
• You can create a new hot folder, edit or delete an existing one, and set print conditions at will.
Note
• You can create up to 20 hot folders.

272

Hot Folder iPF8300


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

Creating a New Hot Folder

1. Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, and then click the Add button.

4
Note
• For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, see "Starting
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy." →P.269

2. The Easy Setup Wizard dialog box displays.


Click the Next button.

273

iPF8300 Creating a New Hot Folder


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

3. Select the type of printer to use.


Click the Next button.

4. Select the media type to print.


Note
• If the Borderless Printing checkbox is checked, only media types that can be used for borderless
printing are displayed in the list.

Click the Next button.

274

Creating a New Hot Folder iPF8300


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

5. Select roll paper or cut sheet to print. Also, select the media size to print.
Click the Next button.

6. Select the color matching method.


Click the Next button.

275

7. To receive a document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER, you need to share a folder. Enter the folder
shared name in Shared Name.
Click the Next button.
Note
• This shared name is used as the name of the hot folder.
• You cannot use the Back button, after clicking the Next button here.

iPF8300 Creating a New Hot Folder


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

4
8. Click Finish button to close the Easy Setup Wizard dialog box.

276

Creating a New Hot Folder iPF8300


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

The hot folder you have created appears in the Hot Folder list in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy dialog box.

4
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder

1. Share the folder you want to specify as a hot folder.


2. Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, and then click the Add button.

Note
• For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, see "Starting 277
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy." →P.269

iPF8300 Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

3. The Easy Setup Wizard dialog box displays.


Click the Manual Settings button.

4. The Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box displays.


Enter the hot folder name in Name.
Click the Browse botton, with selecting Specify a folder, to set the existing shared folder.

278

Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder iPF8300


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

5. The location of the folders will appear.


Select the folder to specify a hot folder, and click the OK button.

6. As necessary, set the print conditions in the hot folder. (See "Setting the Print Parameters.") →P.280
Click the OK button to close the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box.

279

iPF8300 Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

The hot folder you have created appears in the Hot Folder list in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy dialog box.

4
Setting the Print Parameters
The printer driver opens when you click the Properties button in the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box. The printer
driver is used to configure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer.

280

Refer to Printer Driver →P.185 for details on the printer driver.


Note
• The only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet, the Page Setup sheet, and the Layout sheet. Some
of the printer driver settings may be disabled.

Apply Sharpness
Place a checkmark here to set the sharpness.

Setting the Print Parameters iPF8300


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

Drag the slider bar to the left or right to adjust. You can also adjust by directly entering a number in the numeric input
field.
Note
• You can input between 0 and 500.
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
• You cannot be applied to PDF files.

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER


Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatical-
ly after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, first complete these settings in the following order.

1. Register a hot folder on your computer.


Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete 4
the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.

After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER.

Registering a hot folder on your computer


Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders. Register a
hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can specify printing
conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to the hot folder will be
printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.

1. Display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating Sys-
tem Menu .") →P.195

281

iPF8300 Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER


Windows Software > Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy >

2. Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.

3. Click Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.
4. Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help file for the Color imageRUNNER
Enlargement Copy utility.

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.


Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned originals to
the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting manual, dis-
played by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER En-
largement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

Scanning the original and print an enlargement


Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer. For de-
tailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

282
1. Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
2. Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
3. Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
4. Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all originals, press
Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you
specified for the folder.

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional


The Features of Print Plug-In .................................................................................................................... 284
Operating Environment ............................................................................................................................. 284
Installation Procedures .............................................................................................................................. 285
Uninstall Procedures ................................................................................................................................. 287
Starting from Photoshop ............................................................................................................................ 288
Starting from Digital Photo Professional .................................................................................................... 289
Print Plug-In Main Window ........................................................................................................................ 290
Preview Area ..................................................................................................................................... 292
Main Sheet ................................................................................................................................................ 293
Page Setup Sheet ..................................................................................................................................... 297
Color Settings Sheet ................................................................................................................................. 299
Print History Sheet .................................................................................................................................... 301
Support Sheet ........................................................................................................................................... 302
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 303
Set Configuration Dialog Box .................................................................................................................... 305
ICC Conversion Options dialog box ......................................................................................................... 306 4
Roll Paper Options Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 307
Size Options Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 308
Curves Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................................... 309
Print History Details Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 310
Utilize Three Types of Previews ................................................................................................................ 311
Check Image with Print Area Layout ................................................................................................. 312
Check the original image with Image ................................................................................................ 313
Check Image with Roll Paper Preview .............................................................................................. 313
Print with a Desired Picture Quality ........................................................................................................... 314
Adjust the Colors and Print ........................................................................................................................ 315
Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Color) ................................................................. 315
Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Monochrome) .................................................... 317
Adjust the Colors by Color Matching ................................................................................................. 319
Print High-Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images ..................................................................................... 320
Prints monochrome photographs with high quality ........................................................................... 322
Using Adobe CMM ............................................................................................................................ 322
Perform Black Point Compensation .......................................................................................................... 324
Perform Printing Press Simulation Print .................................................................................................... 325
Enlarge/Reduce and Print ......................................................................................................................... 326
Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size ................................................................... 326
Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Width of Roll Paper ................................................................. 327
Specify Scaling, Enlarge/Reduce and Print ...................................................................................... 329
Print with No Borders ................................................................................................................................ 330
Customize Media Settings ......................................................................................................................... 331
Utilize Print History .................................................................................................................................... 331 283
Confirm Print History Details ............................................................................................................. 332
Apply Print History to an Image ......................................................................................................... 333
Store Print History to Print Preferences ............................................................................................ 333
Delete Print History ........................................................................................................................... 336
Export Print History from Print Preferences ...................................................................................... 338
Import Print History to Print Preferences ........................................................................................... 339
Delete Print History from Print Preferences ...................................................................................... 341
Set Information to Print with Image ................................................................................................... 343

iPF8300
Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

The Features of Print Plug-In


The main features of Print Plug-In are as follows.
• This software can automatically recognize the color space of images for sRGB and Adobe RGB and can automati-
cally set those images to an optimum profile. Thus, printing of Adobe RGB is made possible without performing
tedious settings.
• This software can directly process image data on Photoshop, and can send that image data to the printer. This al-
lows processing not only RGB8bit image data, but also RGB16bit image data.
• By using the preview function for images based on real images, and the preview function for layouts based on
image positioning by media size, you can use this software to make color adjustments and confirm print layout.
• You can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection, media type and output profile selection, and
matching methods, in addition to borderless printing and enlargement/reduction process without growing through
the printer driver.
• By using the print history management function, you can import past print settings parameters. Additionally, you
can save preferences as a file.
Note
4 • The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print
output to differ from the Print Plug-In settings (the arrangement of the image in the layout preview, the
print start position, and the media size).

• Loss of gradation in dark areas can be reduced by performing black point compensation.
Note
• Adobe CMM is required in order to use the black point compensation function.

• You can perform printing press simulation printing by specifying the printing press profile.

Operating Environment
The Print Plug-In operating environment is as follows.
• Compatible Operating System
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7
• Compatible Photoshop Version
Photoshop CS4, Photoshop CS3, Photoshop CS2, Photoshop CS
• Compatible Digital Photo Professional Version
Digital Photo Professional Version 3.6x or later
• Software needed for Print Plug-In Installation
284 Photoshop or Digital Photo Professional, imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
Note
• The supported OS version differs for each version of Photoshop. Check with Adobe for details.
• When Photoshop CS4 is installed on a system with a 64-bit Windows OS, both the 32-bit and 64-bit ver-
sions of Photoshop CS4 are installed. Note that Print Plug-In only supports the 32-bit version of Photo-
shop CS4. It does not operate in the 64-bit version of Photoshop CS4.
• The supported OS version differs for each version of Digital Photo Professional.

The Features of Print Plug-In iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Installation Procedures
The procedures to install Print Plug-In are as follows.

1. Insert the User Software CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive to start the installer.
Note
• If the installer screen does not appear, open the CD-ROM icon in My Computer and click on
setup.exe to open the icon.

2. Click imagePROGRAF Print Plug-in button.

3. Click the appropriate Install button for your Print Plug-In.

285

iPF8300 Installation Procedures


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Note
• If a version of Photoshop that is not compatible with Print Plug-In is installed, the message No
target software exists. is displayed. Install Print Plug-In in a computer with a compatible Photo-
shop installed. (See "Operating Environment.") →P.284
• If the folder for the Photoshop Plug-In to install Print Plug-In cannot be found, Specify the desti-
nation for installation of the plug-in? will appear. In this case, refer to the Photoshop manual
then specify a folder for the Plug-In.
• The Print Plug-In cannot be installed in Photoshop until after Photoshop has been installed and
then opened at least once on a PC. Install the Print Plug-In after installing, opening and quitting
Photoshop.

4. Click Next button.

5. After you have read the Licensing Agreement, select I accept the terms of the license agreement and click the
Next button.

286

Installation Procedures iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

6. Click Install button.

4
7. Click Finish button.

Print Plug-In installation is complete.

287
Uninstall Procedures
The procedures for uninstalling the Print Plug-In are as follows.
• Uninstall the Print Plug-In for Photoshop

1. Select start in Control Panel menu.

2. Open Add or Remove Programs.

3. Select Canon iPFxxxx Print Plug-In for Photoshop xx, then click Change/Remove.

• Uninstall the Print Plug-In for Digital Photo Professional

iPF8300 Uninstall Procedures


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

1. Select start in Control Panel menu.


2. Open Add or Remove Programs.

3. Select Canon iPFxxxx Print Plug-In for Digital Photo Professional, then click Change/Remove.

Note
• iPFxxxx is the name of your printer.

Starting from Photoshop


Follow the procedure below to start the Print Plug-In from Photoshop.

1. Start Photoshop.
2. Open the image that you wish to print.
4 3. If required, select the print range.
Note
• Images for use with Print Plug-In are less than 60,000 pixels in width and height. Reduce the se-
lection range or reduce the image with processing for images more than 60,000 pixels in width
and height, and then attempt step 3.

4. Select Export(or Data Export) from the File menu and then select the output plug-in that matches your printer.
The imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop window (known below as the Print Plug-In window) is dis-
played.

288

Note
• If the message below is displayed but the Print Plug-In window is not displayed, install the new-
est imagePROGRAF printer driver and then attempt step 3.
The imagePROGRAF Printer Driver for iPFxxxx is either not installed correctly or not in-
stalled at all. Please install.
(The iPFxxxx portion of the above message will reflect your printer name.)
• If the message below is displayed but the Print Plug-In window is not displayed, convert the im-
age to RGB color or grayscale as the color space and then attempt step 3.
Choose RGB color or grayscale as the color space.
Starting from Photoshop iPF8300
Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Important
• If the profile was created by a commercially available profile creation tool, the profile may have
been created in ICCv4 format. If the image source profile is ICCv4, Adobe CMM is required. If
Adobe CMM has not been installed, a message is displayed and the source profile is changed to
Adobe RGB.
If you want to use an ICCv4 profile, close the plug-in and then install Adobe CMM. Refer to
Using Adobe CMM →P.322 for details on how to install Adobe CMM.

Starting from Digital Photo Professional


Follow the procedure below to start the Print Plug-In from Digital Photo Professional.

1. Start Digital Photo Professional.


2. Open the RGB color image that you want to print.
3. If required, select the print range. 4
Note
• Images for use with Print Plug-In are less than 6,000 pixels in width and height. Reduce the se-
lection range or reduce the image with processing for images more than 6,000 pixels in width and
height, and then attempt step 3.

4. Select File from the Plug-in printing menu and then select the output plug-in that matches your printer.
The imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Digital Photo Professional window (hereinafter referred to as the Print
Plug-In window) is displayed.

289

Important
• If the profile was created by a commercially available profile creation tool, the profile may have
been created in ICCv4 format. If the image source profile is ICCv4, Adobe CMM is required. If
Adobe CMM has not been installed, a message is displayed and the source profile is changed to
Adobe RGB.
If you want to use an ICCv4 profile, close the plug-in and then install Adobe CMM. Refer to
Using Adobe CMM →P.322 for details on how to install Adobe CMM.

iPF8300 Starting from Digital Photo Professional


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Print Plug-In Main Window


The Print Plug-In main window consists of the sheet selection area, and the preview and button area.

Sheet Selection Area


The tabs used to switch between each sheet on the Print Plug-In window are displayed.

290

When you select a tab, a sheet is displayed. The settings available on each sheet are as follows.
• Main Sheet →P.293

• Page Setup Sheet →P.297

• Color Settings Sheet →P.299

• Print History Sheet →P.301

• Support Sheet →P.302

Print Plug-In Main Window iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Preview Area
You can check the settings you made on the image in this area.

About the settings available on the preview area, see "Preview Area." →P.292

Button Area
This contains the buttons Print, Quit and Help

291

• PrintButton
Click this button to begin printing.

• QuitButton
Click this button to close the Print Plug-In window and return to application software.

• HelpButton
Click this button to display the Print Plug-In Help file.

iPF8300 Print Plug-In Main Window


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Preview Area
You can check the settings you made on the image in this area.

Preview
Select the preview display method.
For more information about Preview, see "Utilize Three Types of Previews." →P.311

Setting Details
Print Area Layout Displays the print range and the area out of the print range in the layout match-
ing the Paper Size set.
*You can change the image print position when you drag the image while the
cursor is displayed as .
Image The entire image is displayed.
*You can select the print range when you drag the image while the cursor is dis-

played as .
*When you click the image while the cursor is displayed as , the selected
area is deselected.
Roll Paper Preview Display the media size and roll paper information on the top in the layout print-
ing on roll paper.
292
*To select Roll Paper Preview, select Roll Paper in Paper Source.

Print Selected Range


Place a checkmark here to only print the selected range.
Note
• When you select Preview in the Image, then select a portion of the image on the preview display, this
becomes valid.

Perform Proof in Preview


Place a checkmark here to simulate the colors of the output product in the preview.

Preview Area iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Note
• If Auto (Color) is selected under Output Profile, some media types are enabled.
• If ICC profile is selected under Output Profile, this is always enabled.
• The actual color balance of the print product and the simulation product may differ with some environ-
ments and conditions. In addition, when you have selected an ICC Profile with Output Profile and it is
not compatible with the printer or media that you are using, the color balance of the actual print product
will differ.

Image Properties button

When you click the button to open the Image Properties dialog box, where Image Size, Resolution, Bit and
Color Space information of the image imported to Print Plug-In are displayed.
Click the Close button to return to Print Plug-In.

Main Sheet
You can use this sheet to perform basic settings such as selecting a printer, setting the media type, or adjusting image
quality.

293

Printer
The printer types are displayed.

iPF8300 Main Sheet


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Select button
Click this button to display the Select Printer dialog box.
When you click the OK button after selecting the printer in the Select Printer dialog box, you can change the printer
that corresponds with Print Plug-In.

Media Type
This allows you to select the media type.
For more information about Media Type, see "Customize Media Settings." →P.331

Note
• Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different from
the media set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.

Advanced Settings button


Click the button to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.
For more information about the media detailed settings, see "Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box." →P.303
4
Input Resolution to Plug-in
You can select the resolution to process the image with Print Plug-In.
The following settings are available for resolution.

Setting Details
Accuracy 300ppi This processes images at an accurate resolution. This can control print speed and
memory capacity.
High Accuracy 600ppi This processes images at a more accurate resolution. This setting results in the
best print quality, but this takes more time to print than Accuracy 300ppi while
also requiring more memory capacity.
*This may not be displayed depending on how you set Media Type

Input Bit to Plug-in


You can select the bit number to process with Print Plug-In.
The following settings are available for the input bit number.

Setting Details
High Gradation 8bit This processes images with at 8bit/channel (24 bit).
Highest Gradation 16bit This processes images with at 16bit/channel (48 bit).
*This may not be displayed depending on how you set Media Type and Input
Resolution to Plug-in.
294

Print Mode
Selecting the printing mode strikes the balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The following settings are available for the print mode.

Setting Details
Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode
offers superior printing quality.
High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in Standard or Draft modes,
but this mode offers exceptional printing quality.

Main Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Setting Details
Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are
both important. Printing takes less time than in Highest or High mode.
Draft Choose this setting to print faster. Printing in draft mode can help you work
more efficiently when checking layouts.
Highest (Max. No. of Passes) Use this when the density and gradation in dark areas is insufficient even under
Highest. Note that the time taken to print becomes extremely long.

Note
• The selectable fields may vary according to the Media Type, Input Resolution to Plug-in and Input
Bit to Plug-in settings.

Output Profile
You can select the output profile.
The following settings are available for the output profile.

Setting Details
4
Auto (Color) Performs the optimum color conversion from the input image data color space
information (sRGB, Adobe RGB), media settings etc. You should normally se-
lect these settings.
Auto (Monochrome Photo) Performs the best color conversion to monochrome from the input image data
color space information (sRGB, Adobe RGB), media settings etc.
None (No Color Correction) You cannot perform color conversion with a plug-in. This is useful for creating
an original ICC profile.
External ICC Profiles This selects printer ICC profiles to be output to ICC profiles saved in the OS
standard folder. Use the color space of the input data as well as the select ICC
profile to perform color conversion.

Note
• Auto (Monochrome Photo) can only be selected for the corresponding media types.

Important
• Adobe CMM needs to be installed in order to use ICCv4 profiles. Refer to Using Adobe
CMM →P.322 for details on how to install Adobe CMM.

Proof
This is displayed when an ICC profile is selected as the Output Profile.
When this is checked, you can perform printing press simulation prints.
Refer to Perform Printing Press Simulation Print →P.325 for details on printing press simulation prints.
295
Matching Method
You can select the processing method when performing color conversion.
The following settings are available for the matching method.

Setting Details
Perceptual This converts the image to an image with natural color balance and gradation.
This is useful for pictures.
Perceptual (People, Dark In subdued, dark photos, optimal color matching is applied to attractive repro-
Areas) duction images of people and dark scenes.
Saturation This converts the image to an image with heightened color saturation. The color
balance of pictures and drawings may change.

iPF8300 Main Sheet


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Setting Details
Relative Colorimetric This converts the image with emphasis on color balance before the conversion
or on visual color balance. This is useful for pictures and drawings.

Note
• When the Output Profile you have set is Auto (Monochrome Photo) or None (No Color Correction),
you cannot select a matching method.

ICC Conversion Options button


This is displayed when an ICC profile is selected as the Output Profile.
When this button is clicked, the ICC Conversion Options dialog box is displayed allowing you to configure color con-
version related settings.
Refer to ICC Conversion Options dialog box →P.306 for details on ICC Conversion Options.

Copies
You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.
4
Note
• The maximum value is 99.
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ or ▼.

Set Configuration button


Clicking the button opens the Set Configuration dialog box that provides settings for the adjustment of image sharp-
ness and image enlargement method.
For more information about Set Configuration, see "Set Configuration Dialog Box." →P.305

Defaults button
Click the button to return all of the settings on the Main sheet to their defaults.

296

Main Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Page Setup Sheet


You can use this sheet to set the size of the image to be printed, the media size, and whether to enlarge/reduce the im-
age.

Input Image Size


The size of the image imported to Print Plug-In is displayed.

Borderless Printing
When you place a checkmark here, the Specify Roll Paper Width dialog box is displayed and you can print an image
without borders.
For more information about Borderless Printing, see "Print with No Borders." →P.330
Note
• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

Enlarged/Reduced Printing
When you place a checkmark here, you can print enlarged/reduced images.
When printing an enlarged/reduced image, select the method for enlargement/reduction. The image size sent to the
printer is displayed matching the selected method in Output Image Size.
The following settings are available for enlarged/reduced printing.
297
Setting Details
Fit Paper Size This automatically enlarges/reduces the entire image imported to Print Plug-In
to match the export media size when printing.
Fit Roll Paper Width This automatically enlarges/reduces the entire image imported to Print Plug-In
to match the width of the roll paper with the width of the image when printing.
*Displayed only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
Scaling This enlarges/reduces the entire image by the specified scaling value. Input the
scaling value in numerical characters. You can specify a range between 5-600%.
*You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ or ▼.

iPF8300 Page Setup Sheet


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Note
• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.

Output Image Size


The output image size is displayed up to one place after the decimal point in millimeters.
Note
• When Paper Size is smaller than Output Image Size, part of the image may not print.

Paper Size
You can select the size of the print media.
Note
• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.
• This is not displayed when Fit Roll Paper Width is set in Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
4
Orientation
This selects the print orientation.
The following settings are available for orientation.

Setting Details
Portrait Prints the image on the media as it appears on the screen.
Landscape Prints the image on the media rotated 90 degrees.

Layout
You can select the print position of an image on the media.
The following settings are available for layout.
Layout

Setting Details
Upper-Left of Output Paper Prints the image with fitting the top left of the active print area for Paper Size.
Size
Center of Output Paper Size Prints the center of the image on the center of the selected Paper Size.
Specify Print Start Position You can print with specifying the top and left printing start positions in From
Top Margin and From Left Margin for Paper Size.
From Top Margin Input the margin from the top of the media in numbers.

298 *You can input between -9999 and 9999 mm.


From Left Margin Input the margin from the left of the media in numbers.
*You can input between -9999 and 9999 mm.

Note
• Select Print Area Layout or Image in Preview when you select Layout.

Roll Paper Layout

Setting Details
Upper-Left of Roll Paper Prints the top left of Media Size on the top left of the selected roll paper.
Center of Roll Paper Prints the center of Media Size on the center of the selected roll paper.

Page Setup Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Note
• Select Roll Paper Preview in Preview when you select Roll Paper Layout.

Paper Source
You can select the media source.
The following settings are available for media source.

Setting Details
Roll Paper Select to print on roll paper.
Cut Sheet Select to print on the cut sheet.

Roll Paper Options button


Click this button to open the Roll Paper Options dialog box, where you can set roll paper width and perform auto cut
settings.
For more information about the roll paper options, see "Roll Paper Options Dialog Box." →P.307
4
Size Options
Click the Size Options button to open the Size Options dialog box and you can select a media name, size and other
settings.
For more information about the size options, see "Size Options Dialog Box." →P.308

Defaults button
Click the button to return all of the settings on the Page Setup sheet to their defaults.

Color Settings Sheet


You can use this sheet to adjust image Color, Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and you can set the color balance of
print product more to your liking.

299

Cyan / Magenta / Yellow


You can adjust the strength or weakness of a color by either inputting a numerical value or dragging the slide bar.

iPF8300 Color Settings Sheet


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Note
• You can check the adjustments in the preview display.

Gray Tone
You can adjust gray tone from cool black (cool tones) to warm black (red tones) by either inputting a numerical value or
dragging the slide bar.
Note
• You can check the adjustments in the preview display.

Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the printed image without losing the brightest and darkest areas by either inputting a
numerical value or dragging the slide bar.
Note
• You can check the adjustments in the preview display.
4
Contrast
You can relatively adjust the brightness of the brightest and darkness areas by either inputting a numerical value or
dragging the slide bar.
Note
• You can check the adjustments in the preview display.

Saturation
You can adjust the saturation of vivid color balance to dark color balance by either inputting a numerical value or drag-
ging the slide bar.
Note
• You can check the adjustments in the preview display.

Curves button
Click the button to open the Curves dialog box then set the Channel and other settings.
For more information about Curves, see "Curves Dialog Box." →P.309

Defaults button
300 Click the button to return all of the settings on the Color Settings sheet to their defaults.

Color Settings Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Print History Sheet


You can use this sheet to apply settings history used in printing, and to print information, such as the image file name,
with the image.

Print History and Favorites


This displays a list of print preferences.
Select Restore Defaults and click the Apply button to restore all settings to their initial settings.
Note
• You can check the 3 print preferences in the preview display.

Apply button
When you click the button, the print setting content applies to the current image selected with Print History and Fa-
vorites.

Details button
Click the Details button to open the Print History Details dialog box, where you can manage print history.
For more information about the print history details, see "Print History Details Dialog Box." →P.310

Print Information 301


When you place a checkmark here, you can print the file name and print time and date on the image. The following
settings are available for the print position and content.
For more information about Print Information, see "Set Information to Print with Image." →P.343

Setting Details
Information Print Position Selects the information print position.
Top (Header) Information is printed on the top of the image.
Bottom (Footer) Information is printed on the bottom of the image.
Print History Number Place a checkmark here to print the print history number.
File Name Place a checkmark here to print the file name.
Printed at Place a checkmark here to print the time and date.

iPF8300 Print History Sheet


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Setting Details
Color Adjustment Value Place a checkmark here to print the color adjustment value.
Printer Name Place a checkmark here to print the printer name.
Comment Place a checkmark here to print the comment details.
Comment Details Place a checkmark here to display the comment details.

Edit Comment button


Click the button to display the Edit Comment dialog box, where you can edit the comment.

Support Sheet
You can display product support information and the electronic manual.

Support Information button


Click the button to display websites that contain the latest product information.
Note
• An Internet connection is needed to view the websites.

302 User Manual button


Click the button to display the printer manuals installed on the computer.
Note
• You must have User Manual installed on your computer.

About button
Click the button to open the version information window of the Print Plug-In. Click the OK button in the version infor-
mation window to return to the Print Plug-In window.

Support Sheet iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box


This dialog box appears when you click the Advanced Settings button on the Main Sheet. You can set Drying Time
and Roll Paper Margin for Safety by media type.

Drying Time
Between Pages
This sets the wait time for the ink to dry between each completely printed sheet and the output of the sheet.

Setting Details
Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied.
None The paper is ejected immediately after printing.
30sec. / 1min. / 3min. / 5min. / The sheet is ejected when the specified time after printing has elapsed.
10min. / 30min. / 60min.

Between Scans
This sets the wait time between line scans during printing.

Setting Details
Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied.
None The printing continues to the next line immediately after the last line.
1sec. / 3sec. / 5sec. / 7sec. / The printing continues to the next line after the set time.
9sec.
*For the media type that has problems, such as ink smears on the page or colors
that seem uneven during borderless printing etc., increase the value for this set-
ting. 303

Roll Paper Margin for Safety


Near End Margin
This sets the length of the near end margin of the roll paper.

Setting Details
Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied.
5mm Print at a standard size.
*Select for Media Type that has no problem when printing with a standard size
margin.

iPF8300 Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Setting Details
20mm This setting sets the margin about 17 mm (in the feed direction) longer than the
standard margin for the media size.
*This is for Media Type that has a strong tendency to curl, causing the printhead
to scratch the surface.

Cut Speed
This selects the auto cut speed.

Setting Details
Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied.
Fast Select this setting if cutting with the Standard setting is not clean.
Standard Select this setting when you are not experiencing problems.
Slow Select this setting if cutting with the Standard setting is not clean.

4 Calibration Value
When calibration has been carried out on the printer, use this setting to choose whether or not to use the results.

Setting Details
Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied.
Use Value The calibration results are used for printing.
Disregard Value The calibration results are not used for printing. Select this option to avoid
changes to image color tones during printing due to color calibration.

Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with
the left and right sides inverted.

Unidirectional Printing
Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality. However, the printing
speed becomes slower.

High-Precision Text and Fine Lines


Print increasing ink impact accuracy, particularly for sharper text and fine lines. However, this takes more time than
regular printing.

304 Note
• When Highest (Max. No. of Passes) is selected as the print mode, High-Precision Text and Fine Lines
cannot be selected.

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Set Configuration Dialog Box


This dialog box appears when you click the Set Configuration button on the Main Sheet. You can set the adjustment
of image sharpness and image enlargement method.

Sharpen
Performs adjustment of the sharpness (outline) settings.

Image Enlargement Method


You can select the image enlargement method.
The following settings are available for the image enlargement method.

Setting Details
Nearest Neighbor Performs simple enlargement.
Bilinear Performs line vector enlargement.
Bicubic Adjust pixels with calculation of elements such as a color or brightness of
neighboring pixels.

Close Plug-in After Printing 305


When you place a checkmark here, the plug-in closes after printing finishes.
Note
• If printing does not finish correctly because it was canceled or an error occurred, the plug-in does not
close.

Output Method
You can select the output method.
The following settings are available for the output method.

iPF8300 Set Configuration Dialog Box


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Setting Details
Print Normal printing. The print job data is stored temporarily in the box as the job
prints.
Save in mail box Saves the print data in the mail box.
If you select Save in mail box, you must specify Name of data to be saved.
Print after reception is com- When you place a checkmark here, you can print after saving jobs in the tempo-
plete rary storage space. This cannot be used when Save in mail box is selected.

Initialize all warning dialog boxes


When this is checked, all of the warning dialog boxes that have been set to "Do not show this screen again" become
displayed.

ICC Conversion Options dialog box


This is displayed when an ICC profile is selected in the Output Profile list in the Main sheet and the ICC Conversion
4 Options button is clicked. This allows you to configure detailed color matching related settings.

Conversion Engine
Selects the conversion engine to use when converting colors.
Note
• Adobe CMM needs to be installed in order to use Adobe CMM. Refer to Using Adobe
CMM →P.322 for details on how to install Adobe CMM.

Black Point Compensation


306 Check this check box to perform black point compensation. Loss of gradation in dark areas can be improved by per-
forming black point compensation.
Note
• This can be used if Adobe CMM is selected as the Conversion Engine.

Proof Options
Configures settings related to printing press simulation.
The proof options consist of the following settings.

ICC Conversion Options dialog box iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Setting Details
Simulate Paper Color Select this when performing paper color simulation. When this is on, Simulate
Black Ink is automatically turned on and becomes grayed out.
Simulate Black Ink Select this when performing simulation of black ink. In order to enable this set-
ting, Adobe CMM needs to be selected under Conversion Engine.

Roll Paper Options Dialog Box


This dialog box appears when you click the Roll Paper Options button on the Page Setup Sheet. You can set the roll
paper width and perform the auto cut settings.

Roll Paper Width


This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer.

Automatic Cutting
You can set the printer to cut roll paper automatically or print a guideline for cutting.
The following settings are available for automatic cutting.

Setting Details
Available Each page is automatically cut after it is printed.
None Each page is not cut after it is printed and printing continues without interrup-
tion.
Print Cut Guideline A print cut guideline is printed after each page and printing continues without
interruption.

No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)


When you place a checkmark here, the print data is printed without margins.

307

iPF8300 Roll Paper Options Dialog Box


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Size Options Dialog Box


This dialog box appears when you click the Size Options button on the Page Setup Sheet. You can select a media
name, size and other settings.

4 Paper Size List


Displays all the standard sizes and custom media sizes.

Custom Paper Size Name


You can enter any name up to 63 characters.

Units
You can select the units of measure to use when you define custom media size. Switching this setting resets the units of
measure for the entire Plug-In.

Paper Size
Width
Enter the width of the media size.
Height
Enter the height of the media size.
Note
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

Add button
308 Click the button to register the contents of the settings.

Size Options Dialog Box iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Curves Dialog Box


This dialog box appears when you click the Curves button on the Color Settings Sheet. You can set Channel and other
settings.

Channel
Select from among RGB, Red, Green, or Blue.
Note
• Gray is displayed for monochrome printing and this selection cannot be changed.

Input
Enter an input value.
Note
• The allowed entry range is 0 to 255.
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

Output
Enter an output value.
Note 309
• The allowed entry range is 0 to 255.
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

Load Curves button


Click the button to load stored data for a tone curve.

Save Curves button


Click the button to stores the current tone curve settings.

iPF8300 Curves Dialog Box


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Print History Details Dialog Box


This dialog box appears when you click the Details button on the Print History Sheet. This controls print history. For
more information about Print History Details, see "Utilize Print History." →P.331

Print History
Print History appears in list format.

Display Items Details


Print History Number Displays the print history number.
File Name Displays image file name.
Printed at Displays time and date of printing.
Comment Displays comment details.

Note
• Up to 200 print history items can be displayed. All items above 200 are deleted.
• When you cannot print properly because you canceled the printing or an error occurred, appears to
the left of the print history number.

Delete button
Click the button to delete the selected print history.
310

Add button

Click the button to add the selected print history to preferences.


Note
• Up to 200 print preference items can be added.

Favorites
The print history stored in print preferences displays in list format.

Print History Details Dialog Box iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Note
• You can change the order by selecting an item and dragging it to another place.

Import button
Click the button to import print history saved as a file.

Export button
Click the button to save print history as a file that is stored in print preferences.

Delete button
Click the button to delete print history stored in print preferences.

Settings
Displays the print history settings selected from the Print History or Favorites. 4
Setting Details
Main When you select this the Main sheet settings are displayed.
Page Setup When you select this the Page Setup sheet settings are displayed.
Color Settings When you select this the Color Settings sheet settings are displayed.

Utilize Three Types of Previews


You can use Print Plug-In to check an image in three types of previews.
The preview types are as follows.
• Check Image with Print Area Layout →P.312

• Check the original image with Image →P.313

• Check Image with Roll Paper Preview →P.313

311

iPF8300 Utilize Three Types of Previews


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Check Image with Print Area Layout


Displays the print range and the area out of the print range in the layout matching the media size set in the print area
layout.
Select Print Area Layout in Preview.

Note

• When the cursor on the preview is displayed as on the preview, you can specify the print position
by dragging the image.

• When the cursor is displayed as on the preview, the below conditions on the Page Setup sheet have
all been met.
• There is no checkmark in Borderless Printing.
• There is no checkmark in Enlarged/Reduced Printing or Scaling has been selected.
• Center of Roll Paper has not been selected in Layout..

312

Check Image with Print Area Layout iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Check the original image with Image


In the image preview you can check the entire image that you have input.
Select Image in Preview.

Note

• When the cursor appears as a small magnifying glass while there is an Image in the Preview
area, the Selected Range feature is enabled and you an drag the cursor on the image and select an area
for printing.

• When you click the image while the cursor is displayed as on the preview, the selected area is dese-
lected.

Check Image with Roll Paper Preview


Display the media size and roll paper information on the top in the layout printing on roll paper in Roll Paper Preview
Select Roll Paper Preview in Preview.

313

iPF8300 Check the original image with Image


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Note
• To select Roll Paper Preview in Preview, select Roll Paper in Paper Source.

Print with a Desired Picture Quality


You can specify and print at the resolution you desire.

1. Display the Main sheet.

2. Select the media set to the printer in Media Type.


Note
• Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different
from the media set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.

3. Choose either Accuracy 300ppi or High Accuracy 600ppi for the resolution to process images in Input Reso-
lution to Plug-in.
Note
• When you select Accuracy 300ppi images are processed at an accurate resolution. This can con-
trol print speed and memory capacity.
• When you select High Accuracy 600ppi images are processed at a more accurate resolution.
314 This setting results in the best print quality, but this takes more time to print than Accuracy
300ppi while also requiring more memory capacity.
• High Accuracy 600ppi will not display with some Media Type settings.

4. Choose either High Gradation 8bit or Highest Gradation 16bit for the bit number when processing images in
Input Bit to Plug-in.
Note
• When you select High Gradation 8bit, images are processed at 8 bit/channel (24 bit).
• When you select Highest Gradation 16bit, images are processed at 16bit/channel (48 bit).
• Highest Gradation 16bit will not display with some Media Type or Input Resolution to Plug-
in settings.

Print with a Desired Picture Quality iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

5. Select the mode to be printed when processing images in Print Mode.


Note
• The settings that can be selected differ by Media Type,Input Resolution to Plug-in, and Input
Bit to Plug-in selected.

6. Click the Print button.


Printing begins.

Adjust the Colors and Print


You can adjust the colors to your liking and print images.
The explanation below is on 5 ways to adjust the colors using Print Plug-In.
• Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Color) →P.315

• Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Monochrome) →P.317

• Adjust the Colors by Color Matching →P.319 4


• Print High-Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images →P.320

• Prints monochrome photographs with high quality →P.322

• Using Adobe CMM →P.322

Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Color)


You can adjust the colors while checking the adjustments in the preview.
The following explanation is on the procedures for adjusting example image below.
• Low for Cyan
• High for Yellow
• Low for Saturation
• Warm Black for Gray Tone
• Enhance brightness for the curves

The above image adjustments are reflected in the before and after images below.

Before Application After Application

315

iPF8300 Adjust the Colors and Print


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

1. Display the Color Settings sheet.

2. Drag the slide bar in the direction of Low in Cyan.


3. Drag the slide bar in the direction of High in Yellow.
4. Drag the slide bar in the direction of Low in Saturation.
5. Drag the slide bar in the direction of Warm Black in Gray Tone.
Note
• You can change the numbers by inputting in numerical characters.
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

6. Click the Curves button then click near the center of the curve.

316

Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Color) iPF8300
Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

7. Enter 120 in Input and 135 in Output then click the OK button.

8. Click the Print button.


The adjustments are reflected in the image and printing begins.

Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Monochrome)


You can adjust the colors while checking the adjustments in the preview.
The following explanation is about the procedures for adjusting example image below.
• Low for Contrast
• Light for Highlight
• Light for Shadow
• Enhance brightness for the curves

The unapplied and the applied images of the above image adjustments are as below.

Before Application After Application

317

iPF8300 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Monochrome)
Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

1. Open the Main sheet.


2. Select Auto (Monochrome Photo) in Output Profile.

3. Open the Color Settings sheet.

318

4. In Contrast, drag the slide bar toward Low.


5. In Highlight, drag the slide bar toward Light.
6. In Shadow, drag the slide bar toward Light.
Note
• You can change the numbers by inputting in numerical characters.
• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview (for Monochrome) iPF8300
Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

7. Click the Curves button then click near the center of the curve.
8. Enter 120 in Input and 135 in Output then click the OK button.

9. Click the Print button.


This applies the image adjustments and starts the print job.

Adjust the Colors by Color Matching


When you print a color image imported from a scanner or a digital camera, the image may appear different from the
image on the screen. That is due to the differences in color on the screen and in the printer. In Print Plug-In, you can get
the color balance of the print product closer to the color balance displayed on the screen through performing ICC (Inter-
national Color Consortium) color profile settings, matching method settings, and settings for the internal profile, which
performs optimum color conversion in response to media and resolution settings.

1. Display the Main sheet.

319

iPF8300 Adjust the Colors by Color Matching


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

2. Select the profile in Output Profile.


Note
• When you place a checkmark in Perform Proof in Preview, you can check the color matching in
the preview. This may not be displayed depending on how you set Media Type.
• The details of Output Profile you have set is saved even when you close the Print Plug-In, but
when the specified profile cannot be located it is set to Auto (Color).
• If an ICC profile is selected as the Output Profile, Adobe CMM can be selected as the color
conversion engine. Refer to Using Adobe CMM →P.322 for details.

3. Select the profile matching method in Matching Method.


4. Click the Print button.
Printing begins with the output profile and matching method that you have set.

4 Print High-Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images


This prints a high-quality Adobe RGB16bit image taken with a high-end digital camera. Print Plug-In allows you to
print high color gamut and high tone images, when the Adobe RGB16bit image data has been retouched in Photoshop,
without compromising the level of tone in the image.

1. Select the Adobe RGB16bit image data in Photoshop and start Print Plug-In. (See "Starting from Photoshop.")
→P.288

320

2. Click button.

Print High-Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

3. Check that Adobe RGB is displayed in Color Space, and 16bit/channel is displayed in Bit in the Image Prop-
erties dialog box, and click the Close button.

4. Display the Main sheet.

5. Select High Accuracy 600ppi in Input Resolution to Plug-in.


6. Select Highest Gradation 16bit in Input Bit to Plug-in.
7. Select the highest quality possible in Print Mode.
8. If required, adjust the colors using color matching. 321
Note
• For more information about the color matching, see "Adjust the Colors by Color Matching."
→P.319

9. Click the Print button.


Printing of the Adobe RGB16bit image begins.

iPF8300 Print High-Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Prints monochrome photographs with high quality


Prints images captured with a scanner or digital camera in monochrome with high quality. Provides stable monochrome
photo images without color casts and minimizes the influences of the difference of the light source.

1. Display the Main sheet.

2. Select Auto (Monochrome Photo) in Output Profile.


Note
• Auto (Monochrome Photo) can be selected only after a compatible Media Type has been selec-
ted.

3. Click the Print button.


Performs conversion to the most suitable monochrome and printing begins.

Using Adobe CMM


Adobe CMM is a color conversion engine made by Adobe. Using Adobe CMM makes it possible to obtain uniform
color conversion results and to use the black point compensation function.

How to Obtain Adobe CMM


322
Adobe CMM can be obtained using the following procedure.

1. Open the Adobe website (http://www.adobe.com).


2. Enter "Adobe CMM" in the search input box on the screen.
3. Search for the "Adobe Color Management Module (CMM)" item and select the Windows version.
4. Download the file by following the on-screen directions.

Prints monochrome photographs with high quality iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

5. Start the installer in the downloaded file to perform the installation.


Important
• Use version 1.1 or higher of Adobe CMM.

Adobe CMM System Requirements


The system requirements for Adobe CMM are as follows.
• Supported OS
Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista

• Supported CPU
Intel Xeon, Xeon Dual, Intel Centrino, Pentium 4 processor
Note
• Check with Adobe for details.

How to Use Adobe CMM 4


The procedure for using Adobe CMM is as follows.

1. Display the Main sheet.

2. Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile. 323

3. Click the ICC Conversion Options button.

iPF8300 Using Adobe CMM


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

4. In the ICC Conversion Options dialog box, select Adobe CMM from Conversion Engine.

5. Click the OK button to close the ICC Conversion Options dialog box.
4
Perform Black Point Compensation
Black point compensation that is equivalent to Photoshop can be performed using the following procedure. Use this to
avoid saturation in the black areas of images.

1. Display the Main sheet.

324

2. Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile.


3. Click the ICC Conversion Options button to open the ICC Conversion Options dialog box.
4. Select Adobe CMM as the Conversion Engine.

Perform Black Point Compensation iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

5. Check the Black Point Compensation check box.

6. Click the OK button to close the ICC Conversion Options dialog box.
Important
• Adobe CMM needs to be installed in order to use black point compensation. Refer to Using
4
Adobe CMM →P.322 for details on how to install Adobe CMM.

Perform Printing Press Simulation Print


You can perform printing press simulation prints by specifying ICC profiles such as Japan Color or SWOP, and specify-
ing an ICC profile for the printing press.

1. Display the Main sheet.

325

2. Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile.


3. Check the Proof check box and select the profile for the printing press you want to target from the list on the
right.

iPF8300 Perform Printing Press Simulation Print


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

4. Click the ICC Conversion Options button to open the ICC Conversion Options dialog box.

5. Configure the Proof Options as needed.


4 Note
• The proof options are Simulate Paper Color and Simulate Black Ink. The settings that can be
selected vary depending on the Conversion Engine settings.

6. Click the OK button to close the ICC Conversion Options dialog box.
7. Click the Print button.
Printing begins.

Enlarge/Reduce and Print


You can enlarge or reduce an image in Print Plug-In.
Three methods to enlarge/reduce and print are as follows.
• Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size →P.326

• Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Width of Roll Paper →P.327

• Specify Scaling, Enlarge/Reduce and Print →P.329

Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size


By specifying the media type loaded in the printer, the image can be enlarged or reduced to fit the size of the image area
of the media. This feature is useful when you need to print on the full width of Media that you have selected.
326
Note
• When you need to print on the full width of roll media, see "Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Width
of Roll Paper." →P.327
• When you do the procedure below to print on roll media, the print job will match the size of the output
with the media selected with the Paper Size setting.

Enlarge/Reduce and Print iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

1. Display the Page Setup sheet.

2. Select the size of the media that you want to print in Paper Size.
Note
• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.
• This is not displayed when Fit Roll Paper Widthis set in Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

3. Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation.
Note
• When you select Portrait, the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen.
• When you select Landscape, the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees.

4. Click the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box on.


Note
• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.

5. Select Fit Paper Size.


6. Click the Print button. 327
The image prints filling the entire output media surface.

Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Width of Roll Paper


You can enlarge/reduce and print an image matching the width of the roll paper set in the printer. This is useful when
you wish to print an image that covers the entire width of the roll paper.
Note
• Printing will not occur properly when a print roll is not set to the printer.

iPF8300 Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Width of Roll Paper


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

1. Display the Page Setup sheet.

2. Select Roll Paper in Paper Source.


3. Click the Roll Paper Options button.
4. Set the roll paper options and click the OK button.
Note
• For more information about the Roll Paper Options dialog box, see "Roll Paper Options Dialog
Box." →P.307
• Click the Defaults button to return all of the roll paper option settings to their defaults.

5. Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation.
Note
• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.

6. Select Fit Roll Paper Width.


7. Click the Print button.
328 The image prints covering the entire width of the roll paper.

Enlarge/Reduce and Print Matching Width of Roll Paper iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Specify Scaling, Enlarge/Reduce and Print


You can specify scaling to enlarge/reduce an image and print. This is useful when you wish to print an image at a spe-
cific size.

1. Display the Page Setup sheet.

2. Select the size of the media that you want to print in Paper Size.
Note
• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.
• Fit Roll Paper Widthis set in Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

3. Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation.
Note
• When you select Portrait, the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen.
• When you select Landscape, the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees.

4. Click the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box on.


Note
• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.
329
5. Select Scaling and input the scaling factor or drag the four corners of the image in the Preview display.
Note
• You can specify scaling rate in intervals of 0.01%.
• You can specify a range between 5.00-600.00%.
• The size of the width and height proportionally grow when the image is enlarged/reduced.

6. Either drag the image on the Print Area Layout preview, or set the print position Layout.
7. Click the Print button.

iPF8300 Specify Scaling, Enlarge/Reduce and Print


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Printing begins at the set scaling rate.

Print with No Borders


You can use the borderless printing function to print without margins surrounding the image.
Note
• With some media borderless printing can be performed only between two edges.
• To use the borderless printing function, the specified media must be set to the printer.

1. Display the Page Setup sheet.

2. Select Roll Paper in Paper Source.


3. Click the Borderless Printing check box on.
Note
• Select the width for roll paper set in the printer in Roll Paper Width in the Specify Roll Paper
Width dialog box, and click OK.

330

4. Click the Print button.


Borderless printing begins.

Print with No Borders iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Customize Media Settings


You can customize media settings.

1. Display the Main sheet.

2. Select the media type that you wish to customize in Media Type.
Note
• Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different
from the media set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.

3. Click the Advanced Settings button.


4. Perform the settings in the Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box →P.303 and click the OK button.

Utilize Print History


When you perform various settings and print in Print Plug-In, those settings are saved as print history. Also, you can
export and import as files. You can store often-used print history under a specified name in print preferences.
Note
• You can save up to 200 print history items. All items over 200 are deleted in chronological order. 331

You can do the following things using print history.


• Confirm Print History Details →P.332

• Apply Print History to an Image →P.333

• Store Print History to Print Preferences →P.333

• Delete Print History →P.336

• Export Print History from Print Preferences →P.338

• Import Print History to Print Preferences →P.339

• Delete Print History from Print Preferences →P.341

• Set Information to Print with Image →P.343

iPF8300 Customize Media Settings


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Confirm Print History Details


You can confirm the print history details.

1. Display Print History sheet.

2. Click the Details button.


Note
• Select the print history you wish to check the details of, from either Print History or Favorites
in the Print History Details dialog box.

332

3. Check the print history details in Settings, and click the OK button.
Note
• You can display the print history details by switching the sheets.

Confirm Print History Details iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Apply Print History to an Image


You can use previous print history, and apply it to an image.

1. Display the Print History sheet.

2. If required, check the print history details. (See "Confirm Print History Details.") →P.332

3. Select the print history you wish to apply from Print History and Favorites, and click the Apply button.

Store Print History to Print Preferences


You can store often-used print history to print preferences. Not only can you store the print history stored under a differ-
ent name in print preferences, you can also find it with ease.
Note
• You can store up to 200 print history items to print preferences.

333

iPF8300 Apply Print History to an Image


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

1. Display the Print History sheet.

2. Click the Details button.


3. Select the print history you wish to store in print preferences from Print History in the Print History Details
dialog box, and check the print history details in Settings.

334

Store Print History to Print Preferences iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

4. Select the print history you wish to store in print preferences from Print History and click the button.

5. In the Add Favorites dialog box input the name of the print history in Name, input a comment in Comment,
and click the OK button.

335

iPF8300 Store Print History to Print Preferences


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

6. Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box.

Delete Print History


You can delete print history.
Important
• Be aware that you cannot undo deletions of print history.

1. Display the Print History sheet.

336

2. Click the Details button.

Delete Print History iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

3. Select the print history you wish to delete from Print History in the Print History Details dialog box, and click
the Delete button.

4. Click the OK button.

5. Click the OKbutton to close the Print History Details dialog box.

337

iPF8300 Delete Print History


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Export Print History from Print Preferences


You can export print history stored in print preferences as a file.

1. Display the Print History sheet.

2. Click the Details button.


3. Select the print history you wish to export from Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box, and click the
Export button.

338

Export Print History from Print Preferences iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

4. Input the name of the print history in File Name in the Save As dialog box, and click the Save button.

4
The print history is exported under the specified file name.

5. Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box.

Import Print History to Print Preferences


You can import print history in file format and store it to print preferences.

1. Display the Print History sheet.

339

2. Click the Details button.

iPF8300 Import Print History to Print Preferences


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

3. Click the Import button in the Print History Details dialog box.

4. Select the print history you wish to import in the Open dialog box, and click the Open button.

The print history is imported.


340 Note
• The print history file name suffix is *.pjb.
• You cannot import a print history file exported from a different OS in Print Plug-In.
• You cannot import a print history file exported from a different printer in Print Plug-In.

Import Print History to Print Preferences iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

5. Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box.

Delete Print History from Print Preferences


You can delete print history store to print preferences. You cannot store more than 200 print history items in print pref-
erences.

1. Display the Print History sheet.

341

2. Click the Details button.

iPF8300 Delete Print History from Print Preferences


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

3. Select the print history you wish to delete from Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box, and click the
Delete button.

4. Click the OK button.

5. Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box.

342

Delete Print History from Print Preferences iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

Set Information to Print with Image


You can print information with an image that is related, such as the file name and the time and date.
Note
• When you use the borderless printing function to print, the information will not be printed. (See "Print
with No Borders.") →P.330
• When the printed information is too long as does not fit on the media, a break will appear in the printed
information.
• The information may print on the image data with some media sizes, enlargement rates and print position
values.
• When Keep Media Size is set to On on the printer, a portion of bottom of the print data is not printed.

1. Display the Print History sheet.

2. Click the Print Information check box on.


3. Select the position where you wish to print the information in Information Print Position.
4. Click the information check box you wish to print on.
5. When you wish to edit the comment, click the Edit Comment button. 343
Note
• When you do not wish to edit the comment, move to step 7.

iPF8300 Set Information to Print with Image


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional >

6. Input the comment in the Edit Comment dialog box, and click OK button.

4 7. Click the Print button.

Comments are printed with images.

344

Set Information to Print with Image iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Print Plug-In for Office


Print Plug-In for Office features ................................................................................................................. 345
Operating Environment ............................................................................................................................. 345
Steps to install ........................................................................................................................................... 346
Steps to uninstall ....................................................................................................................................... 349
When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed ........................................................................................... 350
To start from Microsoft Word ..................................................................................................................... 353
Print Matching Roll Width (Word) .............................................................................................................. 355
Borderless Printing (Word) ........................................................................................................................ 357
Multi-Page Printing (Word) ........................................................................................................................ 360
Register the settings(Word) ....................................................................................................................... 362
Print Using Registered Settings (Word) .................................................................................................... 363
Portrait Orientation / Landscape Orientation (Word) ................................................................................. 365
To start from Microsoft PowerPoint ........................................................................................................... 367
Print Matching Roll Width (PowerPoint) .................................................................................................... 369
Borderless Printing (PowerPoint) .............................................................................................................. 371
Multi-Page Printing (PowerPoint) .............................................................................................................. 374 4
Register the settings(PowerPoint) ............................................................................................................. 376
Print Using Registered Settings (PowerPoint) ........................................................................................... 377
Portrait Orientation / Landscape Orientation (PowerPoint) ....................................................................... 379
To start from Microsoft Excel ..................................................................................................................... 381
Print Entire Sheet (Excel) .......................................................................................................................... 382
Print Selected Area (Excel) ....................................................................................................................... 386
Configuring Binding (Excel) ....................................................................................................................... 389
Configuring Special Settings ..................................................................................................................... 390

Print Plug-In for Office features


Print Plug-In for Office is a Plug-In that enables easy printing from Microsoft Office.
• It is displayed on the toolbar/ribbon, so it is easily accessible.
• It can be set by just selecting from the Wizard.
• Large-Format Printing custom media size can also be set in the Wizard from Microsoft Word or Microsoft
PowerPoint.
• Custom media size can be set automatically from Microsoft Excel.
• The layout can be checked before printing by starting the preview screen.
Important
• The Print Plug-In for Office toolbar/ribbon might not be displayed in Microsoft Office after installing
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Office. 345
Refer to the following topic for details on how to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Of-
fice toolbar/ribbon.
• When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed →P.350

Operating Environment
Print Plug-In for Office 's operating environment is as below.
• Compatible Operating System
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7

• Software that requires installation

iPF8300 Print Plug-In for Office features


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Microsoft Office 2000/XP/2003/2007


imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Ver. 3.95 or later

• Hardware
CPU 2.0 GHz Pentium 4 or better
RAM 512 MB or more
Important
• If you opened the Office document from Internet Explorer, the software will not run correctly.
• If you are editing an embedded object or link object, the software will not run correctly.
• If you added the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In ribbon to the Microsoft Office 2007 Quick Access
toolbar, the software will not run correctly.

Steps to install
Below are the steps to install Print Plug-In for Office.

4 Note
• You must log into Windows as an Administrator before the installation.

1. Insert "User Software CD-ROM" into the CD-ROM drive and start the installer.
Note
• If the installer screen does not display, open the CD-ROM icon from My Computer, click set-
up.exe, and open the icon.

2. Click the Install Individual Software button.

346

Steps to install iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

3. Click Install in imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Office.

4. Click the Next button.

347

iPF8300 Steps to install


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

5. Read the License Agreement, and click the Yes button.

6. Click the Start button.

348 7. Click the Yes button.

Steps to install iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

8. Click the Exit button.

The installation for Print Plug-In for Office is complete.


Important
• When you install this software, the virtual printer Canon imagePROGRAF PrintPlugIn may be instal-
led. If you want to use this software, do not uninstall the virtual printer Canon imagePROGRAF Print-
PlugIn.
• It is required to install imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Office for each user. If the PC is used by
more than one person, install it for each user.
• The Print Plug-In for Office toolbar/ribbon might not be displayed in Microsoft Office after installing
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Office.
Refer to the following topic for details on how to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Of-
fice toolbar/ribbon.
• When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed →P.350

Steps to uninstall
Below are the steps to uninstall Print Plug-In for Office.

1. If Microsoft Office is open, close it.


349
2. Select Control Panel from the start menu.
3. Open Add or Remove Programs.
4. Select imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In, and click the Remove button.

iPF8300 Steps to uninstall


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

4 Note
• You cannot uninstall Print Plug-In for Office if an Office application is running. When a message ap-
pears, select Cancel and close all Office applications that are running.

When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed


Buttons such as Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In sometimes do not appear in the Word, PowerPoint and Excel
Office applications, and the Print Plug-In for Office functions are not available.
In this event, re-install Print Plug-In for Office.
If you are using Microsoft Office 2003 or later, you can also enable add-ins to display Print Plug-In for Office.
See below for the procedure for re-installing the plug-in or enabling add-ins.

Re-installing Print Plug-In for Office


• Copies of Print Plug-In for Office are installed for each user. If the same PC has multiple users, install the plug-in
for each user.
• If a problem occurs, such as the system or an application terminating abnormally, the Microsoft Office application
disables add-ins as a safety precaution.

In this event, you will need to re-install Print Plug-In for Office to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In tool-
bar/ribbon.
Note
• You cannot re-install Print Plug-In for Office once an Office application is running. When the message
350 appears, select Cancel and close the active Office application.

Re-install Print Plug-In for Office as follows:

1. Close Microsoft Office if it is open.


2. Install Print Plug-In for Office.
For information about instsalling, see "Steps to install." →P.346

Enabling Print Plug-In for Office for items disabled in Office applications
• If a problem occurs, such as the system or an application terminating abnormally, the Microsoft Office application
disables add-ins as a safety precaution.

When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

In this event, you will need to restore the disabled add-ins in order to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In
toolbar/ribbon.
Use the procedure below to restore the add-ins disabled by Microsoft Office.
For Microsoft Office 2007

1. Click the Office button and then click the <application name> options button.

2. From the list on the left side of the <application name> options dialog box, select Add-ins.
3. Select Disabled Items in the Manage combo box and click the Go button.

351

iPF8300 When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

4. If Addin imageprograf print plug-in (mscoree.dll) is displayed in the Disabled Items dialog box, select it and
click the Enable button.

5. Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application.
For Microsoft Office 2003
4 1. Click About <application name> in the Help menu of application.

2. Click the Disabled Items button in the About <application name> dialog box.

352

When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

3. If Addin imageprograf print plug-in (mscoree.dll) is displayed in the Disabled Items dialog box, select it and
click the Enable button.

4. Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application.

To start from Microsoft Word 4


Below are the steps to start Print Plug-In for Office from Microsoft Word.

1. Start Microsoft Word.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed on the toolbar/ribbon, click it.

Important
• If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is not displayed, refer to the following.
• When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed →P.350

3. Check that the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is displayed.

4. Click the buttons on the toolbar/ribbon according to the items you want to set. 353

Icon Contents
Displays the About, Help, and Special Settings dialog boxes.
You can change the settings using the Special Settings dialog box.
Menu Refer to Configuring Special Settings →P.390 for details.
Select Printer.
If you select Show All Printers, the imagePROGRAF printers will be dis-
Printer list played again. Select this when you want to display all printer drivers or update
the display.

iPF8300 To start from Microsoft Word


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Icon Contents
The print Wizard is displayed.
The settings Print Matching Roll Width, Borderless Printing, Multi-Page
Printing, and Print Using Registered Settings can be set.

Print Button
Large-Format Wizard is displayed.
Settings for Portrait or Landscape Orientation can be set.

Paper Settings Button

Printing Wizard dialog box

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close
the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the tool-
bar.

354

To start from Microsoft Word iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing Wiz-
ard is open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to
change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.
• The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data
again.

Print Matching Roll Width (Word)


Prints to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, and also print Portrait and Landscape orien-
tations made in Large-Format Printing Wizard.

1. Start Microsoft Word.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

355

iPF8300 Print Matching Roll Width (Word)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

3. Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is
open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays
or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

4. Click Print Matching Roll Width.

356

5. Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.


6. Select image size.

Print Matching Roll Width (Word) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

7. Select layout.
8. Select Next.

9. Select Media Type.


10. Select Print Range from All Pages, Current Page, and Pages.
If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.

11. Enter Copies.


Note
• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
• The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if
you to need print multiple times using the same setting.
• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes
to the layout in the preview screen.
• When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum length will be the lesser of 5.587
times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.

12. Press Print to start printing. 357

Borderless Printing (Word)


Prints up to the border of the media. Photos and posters can be printed without worrying about margins.

1. Start Microsoft Word.

iPF8300 Borderless Printing (Word)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3. Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is
open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays
or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

4. Click Borderless Printing.

358

Borderless Printing (Word) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

5. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. If the data fills up the page, confirm that Continue using the plug-in is
selected in Choose how to proceed and press OK.
Note
• To adjust the data, select Return to application and press OK. Exit Print Plug-In for Office
and return to the application.

6. Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.


7. Select Layout.
8. Select Next.

359

9. Select Media Type.


iPF8300 Borderless Printing (Word)
Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

10. Select Print Range from All Pages, Current Page, and Pages.
For Pages, insert the page number.

11. Enter Copies.


Note
• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
• Press the One-Touch Registration button to register the settings. This is useful for multiple
printing using the same settings.
• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can confirm and make
changes to the layout in the preview screen.
• The maximum length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 5.587 times the roll paper width, or
18.0m.

12. Press Print to start printing.


4
Multi-Page Printing (Word)
Prints multiple pages as one page. You can print handouts into a single page, or print matter with many pages.

1. Start Microsoft Word.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3. Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

360

Multi-Page Printing (Word) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is
open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays
or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

4. Click Multi-Page Printing.

5. Select the Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.


6. Select layout from Layout Selection.
7. Select Next.

361

8. Select Media Type.


iPF8300 Multi-Page Printing (Word)
Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

9. Select Print Range from All Pages, Current Page, and Pages.
If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.

10. Enter Copies.


Note
• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
• The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if
you to need print multiple times using the same setting.
• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes
to the layout in the preview screen.
• The maximum length for Multi-Page Printing is the lesser of 5.587 times the roll paper width, or
18.0m.

11. Press Print to start printing.


4
Register the settings(Word)
If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting, you can select One-Touch Registration. Registered
settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings.

1. Set up to the Print screen from Print Matching Roll Width, Borderless Printing or Multi-Page Printing of
Printing Menu.
Note
• Up to 20 items can be registered.
• The available settings are as follows.
• Print Matching Roll Width (Word) →P.355

• Borderless Printing (Word) →P.357

• Multi-Page Printing (Word) →P.360

2. Click the One-Touch Registration button.

362

3. Enter name in Name.


Up to 31 characters can be entered.

4. Click . The name you entered is displayed in Registered Settings.

Register the settings(Word) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

5. Click OK, and return to the Print screen.


6. Click Print to print, and click Cancel to cancel the print.
Note
• Clicking Cancel in the Print screen will not delete the registered settings.

Print Using Registered Settings (Word)


Prints using the registered settings.

1. Start Microsoft Word.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
4

3. Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

363

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is
open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays
or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

iPF8300 Print Using Registered Settings (Word)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

4. Click Print Using Registered Settings.

5. Click the Next button.

364

6. Select Media Type.


7. Select Print Range from All Pages, Current Page, or Pages.
If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.

Print Using Registered Settings (Word) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

8. Enter Copies.
Note
• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes
to the layout in the preview screen.
• The maximum print length when printing with the registered settings is the lesser of 5.587 times
the roll paper width, or 18.0m.

9. Press Print to start printing.

Portrait Orientation / Landscape Orientation (Word)


Print to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, or print the Landscape or Portrait Orienta-
tion Page Sizes made in the Large-Format Printing Wizard.
4
Create Page Size in Portrait or Landscape Orientation.
Use the Large-Format Printing Wizard to create portrait page sizes for Potrait Orientation, and landscape page sizes
for Landscape Orientation.

1. Start Microsoft Word.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3. Click Paper Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


The Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Note
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing
Wizard is open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not
be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

365

iPF8300 Portrait Orientation / Landscape Orientation (Word)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

4. Click Portrait Orientation or Landscape Orientation.


Note
• The steps taken to create a Portrait Page Size will be used as an example to explain the procedure.

366

5. Adjust Length from the list-box or slide-bar.


6. Click the Create Page button.

Portrait Orientation / Landscape Orientation (Word) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

7. Click OK if the message is displayed.

8. Edit and create the document.


Note 4
• Printing is done in Print Matching Roll Width of the Printing Wizard. For details on Print
Matching Roll Width, refer to see "Print Matching Roll Width (Word)." →P.355 .

Important
• The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data
again.

To start from Microsoft PowerPoint


Below are the steps to start Print Plug-In for Office from Microsoft PowerPoint.

1. Start Microsoft PowerPoint.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed on the toolbar/ribbon, click it.

Important
• If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is not displayed, refer to the following.
• When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed →P.350 367

3. Check that the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is displayed.

4. Click the buttons on the toolbar/ribbon according to the items you want to set.

iPF8300 To start from Microsoft PowerPoint


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Icon Contents
Displays the About, Help, and Special Settings dialog boxes. (See "Configur-
ing Special Settings.") →P.390
Menu
Select Printer.
If you select Show All Printers, the imagePROGRAF printers will be dis-
Printer list played again. Select this when you want to display all printer drivers or update
the display.
The print Wizard is displayed.
The settings Print Matching Roll Width, Borderless Printing, Multi-Page
Printing, and Print Using Registered Settings can be set.

Print Button
Large-Format Wizard is displayed.
Settings for Portrait or Landscape Orientation can be set.

4 Paper Settings Button

Printing Wizard dialog box

Important
368
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close
the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the tool-
bar/ribbon.

Note
• If you open a password protected document as read-only, the Printing Wizard cannot be run.

To start from Microsoft PowerPoint iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing Wiz-
ard is open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to
change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.
• The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data
again.

Note
• If you open a password protected document as read-only, the Large-Format Printing Wizard cannot be
run. Remove the password protection.

Print Matching Roll Width (PowerPoint)


Prints to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, and also print Portrait and Landscape orien-
tations made in Large-Format Printing Wizard.

1. Start Microsoft PowerPoint.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
369

iPF8300 Print Matching Roll Width (PowerPoint)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

3. Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is
open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays
or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

4. Click Print Matching Roll Width.

370

5. Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.


6. Select image size.

Print Matching Roll Width (PowerPoint) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

7. Select layout.
8. Select Next.

9. Select Media Type.


10. Select Print Range from All Slides, Current Slide, and Slides.
If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.

11. Enter Copies.


Note
• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
• The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if
you to need print multiple times using the same setting.
• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes
to the layout in the preview screen.
• When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum print length is the lesser of 13.44
times the roll paper width for Microsoft PowerPoint 2000 or 14.22 times the roll paper width for
Microsoft PowerPoint 2002 or later, or 18.0m.
371
12. Press Print to start printing.

Borderless Printing (PowerPoint)


Prints up to the border of the media. Photos and posters can be printed without worrying about margins.

1. Start Microsoft PowerPoint.

iPF8300 Borderless Printing (PowerPoint)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3. Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is
open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays
or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

4. Click Borderless Printing.

372

Borderless Printing (PowerPoint) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

5. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. If the data fills up the page, confirm that Continue using the plug-in is
selected in Choose how to proceed and press OK.
Note
• To adjust the data, select Return to application and press OK. Exit Print Plug-In for Office
and return to the application.

6. Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.


7. Select Layout.
8. Select Next.

373

9. Select Media Type.


iPF8300 Borderless Printing (PowerPoint)
Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

10. Select Print Range from All Slides, Current Slide, and Slides.
If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.

11. Enter Copies.


Note
• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
• Press the One-Touch Registration button to register the settings. This is useful for multiple
printing using the same settings.
• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can confirm and make
changes to the layout in the preview screen.
• The maximum print length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 13.44 times the roll paper width
for Microsoft PowerPoint 2000 or 14.22 times the roll paper width for Microsoft PowerPoint
2002 or later, or 18.0m.

12. Press Print to start printing.


4
Multi-Page Printing (PowerPoint)
Prints multiple pages as one page. You can print handouts into a single page, or print matter with many pages.

1. Start Microsoft PowerPoint.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3. Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

374

Multi-Page Printing (PowerPoint) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is
open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays
or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

4. Click Multi-Page Printing.

5. Select the Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.


6. Select layout from Layout Selection.
7. Select Next.

375

8. Select Media Type.


iPF8300 Multi-Page Printing (PowerPoint)
Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

9. Select Print Range from All Slides, Current Slide, and Slides.
If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.

10. Enter Copies.


Note
• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
• The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if
you to need print multiple times using the same setting.
• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes
to the layout in the preview screen.
• The maximum print length for Multi-Page Printing is the lesser of 13.44 times the roll paper
width for Microsoft PowerPoint 2000 or 14.22 times the roll paper width for Microsoft Power-
Point 2002 or later, or 18.0m.

11. Press Print to start printing.


4
Register the settings(PowerPoint)
If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting, you can select One-Touch Registration. Registered
settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings.

1. Set up to the Print screen from Print Matching Roll Width, Borderless Printing or Multi-Page Printing of
Printing Menu.
Note
• Up to 20 items can be registered.
• The available settings are as follows.
• Print Matching Roll Width (PowerPoint) →P.369

• Borderless Printing (PowerPoint) →P.371

• Multi-Page Printing (PowerPoint) →P.374

2. Click the One-Touch Registration button.

376

3. Enter name in Name.


Up to 31 characters can be entered.

Register the settings(PowerPoint) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

4. Click . The name you entered is displayed in Registered Settings.

5. Click OK, and return to the Print screen.


6. Click Print to print, and click Cancel to cancel the print.
Note
• Clicking Cancel in the Print screen will not delete the registered settings.

Print Using Registered Settings (PowerPoint)


Prints using the registered settings.

1. Start Microsoft PowerPoint.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it. 4

3. Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

377

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is
open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays
or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

iPF8300 Print Using Registered Settings (PowerPoint)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

4. Click Print Using Registered Settings.

5. Click the Next button.

378

6. Select Media Type.


7. Select Print Range from All Slides, Current Slide, and Slides.
If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.

Print Using Registered Settings (PowerPoint) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

8. Enter Copies.
Note
• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes
to the layout in the preview screen.
• The maximum print length when printing with the registered settings is the lesser of 13.44 times
the roll paper width for Microsoft PowerPoint 2000 or 14.22 times the roll paper width for Mi-
crosoft PowerPoint 2002 or later, or 18.0m.

9. Press Print to start printing.

Portrait Orientation / Landscape Orientation (PowerPoint)


Print to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, or print the Landscape or Portrait Orienta-
tion Page Sizes made in the Large-Format Printing Wizard.
4
Create Page Size in Portrait or Landscape Orientation.
Use the Large-Format Printing Wizard to create portrait page sizes for Potrait Orientation, and landscape page sizes
for Landscape Orientation.

1. Start Microsoft PowerPoint.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3. Click Paper Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


The Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

379

iPF8300 Portrait Orientation / Landscape Orientation (PowerPoint)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing
Wizard is open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not
be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

4. Click Portrait Orientation or Landscape Orientation.


Note
• The steps taken to create a Portrait Page Size will be used as an example to explain the procedure.

5. Adjust Length from the list-box or slide-bar.


6. Click the Create Page button.
7. Click OK if the message is displayed.

380

Portrait Orientation / Landscape Orientation (PowerPoint) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

8. Edit and create the document.


Important
• The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the
data again.

Note
• Printing is done in Print Matching Roll Width of the Printing Wizard. For details on Print
Matching Roll Width, refer to see "Print Matching Roll Width (PowerPoint)." →P.369 .

To start from Microsoft Excel


Below are the steps to start Print Plug-In for Office from Microsoft Excel.

1. Start Microsoft Excel.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed on the toolbar/ribbon, click it. 4

Important
• If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is not displayed, refer to the following.
• When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed →P.350

3. Check that the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is displayed.

4. Click the buttons on the toolbar/ribbon according to the items you want to set.
Icon Contents
Displays the About, Help, and Special Settings dialog boxes. (See "Configur-
ing Special Settings.") →P.390
Menu
Select Printer. 381
If you select Show All Printers, the imagePROGRAF printers will be dis-
Printer list played again. Select this when you want to display all printer drivers or update
the display.
The print Wizard is displayed.
The settings Print Entire Sheet and Print Selected Area can be set.

Print Button

iPF8300 To start from Microsoft Excel


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Printing Wizard dialog box

Important
• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close
the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the tool-
bar/ribbon.
• The Printing Wizard will not start if you click the Print button on the toolbar/ribbon while editing a
cell.
• When more than one worksheet is selected, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. Select only one work-
sheet and click Print again.
• When an object is selected, the Printing Wizard is not started if you click the Print button on the tool-
bar/ribbon.
• If the paper size in Excel is blank, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. From the File menu in Excel,
select Page Setup and check Paper size.

Note
• If you click the Print button with a graph selected, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want
to continue printing. If you click No, you will return to the application.
• If you click the Print button with a page break set, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want
to continue printing. If you click No, you will return to the application. If you do not use the set page
break, check the page break preview and change the setting.
• If you click the Print button with a page range set, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want
382 to continue printing. If you click No, you will return to the application. If you do not use the set page
range, check the page break preview and change the setting.
• If you click the Print button with a worksheet or cell protected, a message dialog box will appear asking
if you want to continue printing. If you click No, you will return to the application. If you want to change
the setting, remove the protection from the worksheet or cell.

Print Entire Sheet (Excel)


For resizing the entire sheet to fit the roll width. Choose this option to enlarge the currently displayed sheet before print-
ing.

1. Start Microsoft Excel.


Print Entire Sheet (Excel) iPF8300
Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3. Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


Important
• When more than one worksheet is selected, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. Select only one
worksheet and click Print again.

If a print area is set, a confirmation message dialog box will appear.


To print the entire sheet, cancel the setting of the print area.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

383

iPF8300 Print Entire Sheet (Excel)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

4. Click Print Entire Sheet.


A message will appear informing you that analysis is in progress.

The Layout menu will appear automatically.

384

Important
• If column A or row 1 is not displayed, the data cannot be analyzed. Redisplay the data and then
run the analysis.

Note
• If data analysis requires time, a message dialog will appear. If you select No, you will return to
the application.

5. Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.

Print Entire Sheet (Excel) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

6. Select image size.


7. Select layout.
8. To configure Binding, click the Binding Settings button.
Refer to Configuring Binding (Excel) →P.389 for details on the procedure for configuring Binding.

9. Select Next.

10. Select Media Type.


11. Enter Copies.
Note
• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes
to the layout in the preview screen.
• When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum print length is 18.0m.

12. If the upper and lower margins are too wide, check No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper). 385
The upper and lower margins can be checked in Print Preview.

13. Press Print to start printing.


Important
• If divided into plural pages, try reducing the data size or the range you select.
• You cannot run Print or Print Preview if you select it for a worksheet with no data displayed.

iPF8300 Print Entire Sheet (Excel)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Print Selected Area (Excel)


For resizing the selected range of cells to fit the roll width. Choose this option to enlarge a particular part of the sheet
before printing.

1. Start Microsoft Excel.


2. If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3. Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.


Important
• When more than one worksheet is selected, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. Select only one
4 worksheet and click Print again.

If a print area is set, a confirmation message dialog box will appear.


To print the selected area, cancel the setting of the print area.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

386

4. Click Print Selected Area.


Important
• If only one cell is selected, Print Selected Area cannot be selected.

Print Selected Area (Excel) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

A message will appear informing you that analysis is in progress.

The Layout menu will appear automatically.

387
Important
• If the range selected in Excel 2007 is too large, it will not be possible to analyze the data. Select a
smaller range and then run the analysis.
• If column A or row 1 is not displayed, the data cannot be analyzed. Redisplay the data and then
run the analysis.

Note
• If data analysis requires time, a message dialog will appear. If you select No, you will return to
the application.

5. Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.

iPF8300 Print Selected Area (Excel)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

6. Select image size.


7. Select layout.
8. To configure Binding, click the Binding Settings button.
Refer to Configuring Binding (Excel) →P.389 for details on the procedure for configuring Binding.

9. Select Next.

10. Select Media Type.


11. Enter Copies.
Note
• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes
to the layout in the preview screen.
• When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum print length is 18.0m.

388
12. If the upper and lower margins are too wide, check No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper).
The upper and lower margins can be checked in Print Preview.

13. Press Print to start printing.


Important
• If divided into plural pages, try reducing the data size or the range you select.
• You cannot run Print or Print Preview if you select it for a worksheet with no data displayed.

Print Selected Area (Excel) iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Configuring Binding (Excel)


You can configure Binding margins for binding printouts.

1. Configure the settings up to Layout Selection in the Layout screen in Print Entire Sheet or Print Selected
Area.
Refer to Print Entire Sheet (Excel) →P.382 and Print Selected Area (Excel) →P.386 for the configuration
methods.

2. Click the Binding Settings button.


Important
• You cannot click the Binding Settings button in the following situations.
• When the Image Size is set to 100%
• When a graph is selected
• When page breaks have been set
• When a sheet or cell is protected
4
Open the Binding Settings dialog box.

3. If the Binding checkbox is not checked, select it to turn binding on.


4. Select Binding Edge.
5. Select Binding Margin.

389

iPF8300 Configuring Binding (Excel)


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

6. Click the OK button.


Return to the Layout screen.

Check that the Binding settings are applied in the preview screen.

7. Configure the settings in the Printing Wizard dialog box.

Configuring Special Settings


You can configure Special Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar.

1. Click imagePROGRAF in the toolbar, and select Special Settings.

390 2. Turn the checkbox for the item you want to change on or off.
Item Details
Show progress indicator during plug-in When this setting is off, hides the progress indicator that appears
startup while the plug-in is starting up.
Ensure image quality when creating page When this setting is on, documents are created at the maximum size.
sizes This reduces the enlargement ratio during actual printing, which
minimizes degradation of the quality of photos, etc.
This function is only valid in Microsoft PowerPoint.

Configuring Special Settings iPF8300


Windows Software > Print Plug-In for Office >

Item Details
Center sheets and print areas When this setting is off, printing is performed without changing the
position. When this setting is on, printing is performed with the top,
bottom, left, and right margins layed out equally. When this setting
is off, printing is performed without changing the position.
This function is only valid in Microsoft Excel.

3. Click OK to close the Special Settings dialog box.

391

iPF8300 Configuring Special Settings


Windows Software > Status Monitor >

Status Monitor
The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .................................................................................... 392
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ........................................................................ 393

The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor


imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : Printer List shows a list of printers, and Status Moni-
tor shows details for each printer.

392

• You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer, printers connec-
ted to your computer, and printers found on the network.
• If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.
• Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.

The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor iPF8300


Windows Software > Status Monitor >

• Displays the ink level of every color in the printer. An icon and warning message will notify you when ink levels
are low.
• The type of paper loaded in each media source is identified. You can also check to see if paper has run out.
• This way, the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance for optimal
printing results.
• You can also set up automatic email notification of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you designate
in advance.
• You can check the status of the hard disk and the documents saved on the hard disk.
• You can use the Accounting Manager to collect the print job logs for the printers and check information such as
the printing costs.
For details of the Accounting Manager, see Accounting Manager →P.395 .
Note
• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor 4


You can use the Job sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor for operations such as pausing and canceling print jobs.

393
Preempting Other Jobs
If you select a print job and click the Preempt Other Jobs button, the selected job is printed ahead of the job that
currently precedes it in the print queue.

Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs


Selecting a print job and clicking the Pause button pauses printing of the selected job.
To resume printing of a paused print job, select the print job and click the Resume button.
Note
• Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer, the job can no longer be paused/re-
sumed.

iPF8300 Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor


Windows Software > Status Monitor >

Canceling Print Jobs


Selecting a print job and clicking the Cancel Job button cancels printing of the selected job.
Note
• You cannot cancel other users' print jobs.

Printing Held Jobs


Printing of the job with a Status of Holding is paused because the paper specified by the driver does not match the
paper currently loaded in the printer.
Use the procedure below to print the held job.

1. Select the held job and click the Replace Paper button.
2. Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper.
Note
4 • To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer, select the held job and click Continue to
print button.
• The printing behavior when the paper specified by the driver does not match the paper currently loaded
in the printer can be changed by using Detect Mismatch in the operation panel menu. Refer to Menu
Settings →P.854 for details.

394

Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor iPF8300


Windows Software > Accounting >

Accounting
Accounting Manager ................................................................................................................................. 395
Launching the Accounting Manager .......................................................................................................... 395
Accounting Manager Main Window ........................................................................................................... 396
Accounting Manager Basic Procedures .................................................................................................... 398
Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager ......................................................................................... 399
Setting the Unit Cost for Ink .................................................................................................................. 399
Setting the Unit Cost for Paper ............................................................................................................. 401
Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper .................................................................... 402
Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager ............................................................... 403
Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals ..................................................................... 404
Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition ............................................................................................ 404
Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs .......................................... 404
Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File .................................................................................................... 405
Showing Job Properties ............................................................................................................................ 405
Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data ........................................................................... 405
Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed .......................................................................... 406
4

Accounting Manager
The Accounting Manager stores the printer's print job logs so that you can use the information for checking printing
costs, etc.
The benefits of using the Accounting Manager are outlined below.
• Print Job Log Collection
This allows you to check which documents were printed from each printer, who printed them and when.
• Calculation of the Total Pages Used and the Total Cost
This allows you to use the collected print job logs to calculate totals for items such as the number of pages printed,
the amount of paper used and the printing costs incurred.
• Regular Data Acquisition for Print Jobs
This automatically logs print jobs at regular intervals.
• Exporting Print Job Data
This allows you to export collected print job data as a CSV file.
Important
• The Accounting Manager in Status Monitor displays approximate estimates of the amount of paper con-
sumed and the ink consumed per job. Canon cannot guarantee the accuracy of these estimates. These
estimates will also vary depending on the conditions of printer use.
• Print job log collection is not performed when Set./Adj. Menu-> Printer Info-> Show Job Log of the
control panel is Off. However, 395
• even if Show Job Log is set to Off, regularly acquired jobs that already have been retrieved at that
time are displayed.
• When Show Job Log has been set to On again, all jobs within the printer at that time are displayed.

Launching the Accounting Manager


The procedure for launching the Accounting Manager is shown below.

1. Open the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor window.

iPF8300 Accounting Manager


Windows Software > Accounting >

2. Select Accounting in the Accounting menu.


Or, open the Accounting sheet and click the Accounting button.

Accounting Manager Main Window


The Accounting Manager main window consists of a title bar, menu bar, toolbars, listed job selection area, job list area,
totals area and status bar.

396

Title Bar
This displays the printer model, its serial number and the port number it is using.

Menu Bar
Allows you to select the menu options required for operation.

Accounting Manager Main Window iPF8300


Windows Software > Accounting >

Toolbars
Provide tool buttons and pull-down menus for the main operations.

Note
• You can opt to either show or hide the toolbars in the View menu.

Listed Job Selection Area


You can use this area to select which job log is displayed.
If you are using regular data acquisition, this area allows you to view the collective job logs for each specified period.

For more information on how to select the job logs displayed, see Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and
Regularly Acquired Jobs →P.404 .

Job List Area


This area lists the details of acquired jobs.
It displays a list of either the print jobs on the printers or the regularly acquired print jobs. The displayed information
includes the amounts of paper and ink consumed, the costs, the media type and the time taken for printing.

397

Note
• If the Unit Cost of Ink or Paper have not been set, **** is displayed in the Job Cost field.

iPF8300 Accounting Manager Main Window


Windows Software > Accounting >

Totals Area
Displays the total costs for the selected job and the amounts of paper and ink consumed.

4 Note
• If you are viewing regularly acquired print jobs, selecting a period on the left side of the window dis-
plays the total costs for that period and the amounts of paper and ink consumed.

Status Bar
Displays messages and other information.

Accounting Manager Basic Procedures


398
The first time you use the Accounting Manager, use the following procedures to configure the settings.

1. Configure unit costs, including the costs of ink and paper.


For details of the unit cost settings, see Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager →P.399 .

2. Set options such as the units displayed.


For details of the unit settings, see Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manag-
er →P.403 .

3. If you are using Regular Data Acquisition, configure the Regular Data Acquisition settings.
For details of the Regular Data Acquisition settings, see Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular
Intervals →P.404 .

Accounting Manager Basic Procedures iPF8300


Windows Software > Accounting >

4. Specify the jobs to be listed.


For details of how to select the job logs displayed, see Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and
Regularly Acquired Jobs →P.404 .
This displays the required print job logs and lists the details.

Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager


Select Unit Costs in the Settings menu to open the Unit Costs dialog box. Configure the unit cost settings in this dialog
box.
Note
• When you select a job and then open the Unit Costs dialog box, items with unit costs that have not yet
been configured for that job are shown highlighted.

• Setting the Unit Cost for Ink →P.399

• Setting the Unit Cost for Paper →P.401

• Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper →P.402
4

Setting the Unit Cost for Ink


Open the Ink sheet. Set the unit cost for ink in this sheet.

399

iPF8300 Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager


Windows Software > Accounting >

To set the same unit cost for all the inks

1. Select the Use same price for all ink checkbox.


2. Enter the Tank Capacity and corresponding Price.
3. Click the OK button.
Important
• Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button.

To set different unit costs for each ink color

1. Select the ink color to be costed.

4 2. Enter the Tank Capacity and corresponding Price.


3. Click the Overwrite button.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the inks.
5. Click the OK button.
Important
• Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button.

400

Setting the Unit Cost for Ink iPF8300


Windows Software > Accounting >

Setting the Unit Cost for Paper


Open the Paper sheet. Set the unit cost for paper in this sheet.

1. Select a media type from the Media Type list.


2. Enter the Width and Length of the paper, and the Price per area for the configured width x height.
3. Click the Add button. To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set, click the Overwrite button.
4. Click the OK button.
Important
• Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button. 401

iPF8300 Setting the Unit Cost for Paper


Windows Software > Accounting >

Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper
Open the Other sheet. Use this sheet to set any price for items other than inks and paper.

1. Enter any name in the Name field.


2. Enter a value in Unit Cost.
3. Use Allocated to specify whether the costs are allocated as being incurred by the print job.
4. Click the Add button. To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set, click the Overwrite button.
402 5. Click the OK button.
Note
• You can set unit costs for up to 5 items.

Important
• Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button.

Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper iPF8300
Windows Software > Accounting >

Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager


Select Units and Display in the Settings menu to open the Units and Display dialog box. Use this dialog box to con-
figure the display settings.

Date Display Format


Use this option to select the display format for dates. "YYYY" indicates the year, "MM" the month and "DD" the day.

Currency Unit
Enter the currency unit. Enter a text string up to 3 characters long.

1000 Separator
Use this option to select the symbol used as a separator in numbers. The symbol is inserted every 3 digits.

Decimal Symbol
Use this option to select the symbol used as a decimal point.

Ink Consumed
Use this option to select the unit used for ink consumption.

Paper Width 403


Use this to select the unit used for paper width.

Paper Length
Use this to select the unit used for paper length.

Area Display Format


Use this to select the unit used for paper area.

iPF8300 Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager


Windows Software > Accounting >

Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals


This feature collects print job logs from the printer at regular intervals and saves the logs on your computer.

1. Select Regular Data Acquisition in the Settings menu.


2. Select Acquire print job logs regularly.
3. Click the OK button to close the dialog box.
Note
• Immediately after you configure Regular Data Acquisition, no print jobs are displayed. Wait a few mo-
ments and then select Refresh in the View menu to display the print jobs.
• A maximum of 10,000 records are saved in a print job log. If this number is exceeded, jobs are deleted
from the log starting from the oldest record. To save old data, it is recommended that you export the data
as a CSV file.
For details of how to export print job logs as CSV files, see Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV
4 File →P.405 .

Important
• Print job log collection is not performed when Set./Adj. Menu-> Printer Info-> Show Job Log of the
control panel is Off. However, even if Show Job Log is set to Off, regularly acquired jobs that already
have been retrieved at that time are displayed.

Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition


You can use this procedure to cancel the regular acquisition of print job logs from printers.

1. Select Regular Data Acquisition in the Settings menu.


2. Uncheck the Acquire print job logs regularly option.
3. Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs


The print job logs displayed by the Status Monitor Accounting Manager contain two types of job: Jobs on Printer and
Regularly Acquired Jobs.
You can select whether to display Jobs on Printer or Regularly Acquired Jobs in the Listed Job Selection Area on the
404 left side of the window.

Jobs on Printer
This shows a list of the print jobs currently held on printers.
You can change the number of jobs displayed per page using the Print Jobs Shown Per Page setting in the View menu
or the toolbar.
You can skip to a particular page using the Go to option in the View menu or the toolbar.
Note
• For printers with built-in hard disks, you can view up to 500 print jobs per printer.
• For printers without built-in hard disks, you can view up to 32 print jobs per printer. However, only 10
jobs can be displayed if the printer is switched off.

Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals iPF8300


Windows Software > Accounting >

Regularly Acquired Jobs


This shows a list of regularly acquired print jobs.
To view all the jobs in a set period, specify the period using Period and then Starting Date (or Starting Day of Week
or Starting Month) in the View menu or the toolbar.
For example, to view monthly job logs starting on the 1st of each month, set Period to Monthly and set Starting Date
to 1.
Note
• Up to 10,000 regularly acquired jobs are displayed for each printer.

Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File


You can export the collected print job data in the form of a CSV file by selecting Export Job Cost Data in the File
menu.
Note
• You can also select Export Job Cost Data using the icon in the toolbar. 4
Selected Jobs
Exports the data for the selected print jobs in the job list as a CSV file.
Note
• You can select multiple jobs by holding down the Shift key or Ctrl key as you click the job names.

Listed Jobs
Exports the data for the print jobs currently displayed in the list as a CSV file.

Showing Job Properties


If you select a job in the job list and then select Show Job Properties in the File menu, the Job Properties dialog box
appears, allowing you to check information such as detailed cost data.
You can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button.
Note
• You can also open this dialog box by right-clicking the selected job and selecting Show Job Properties.
Or you can also use the toolbar icon to open the dialog box.
• If you select multiple jobs and open the Job Properties dialog box, the total costs for the selected jobs
are displayed.
405

Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data

Show Unit Cost Data


Select Show Unit Cost Data in the File menu to open the Unit Cost Data dialog box. This lists the unit costs for items
such as the selected ink and paper.
You can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button.

iPF8300 Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File


Windows Software > Accounting >

Save Unit Cost Data


Select a destination folder using Save Unit Cost Data in the File menu. The unit cost data for items such as the selected
ink and paper is saved as a file.

Load Unit Cost Data


Selecting Load Unit Cost Data in the File menu loads saved unit cost data.

Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed


Select Show Ink and Paper Consumed in the File menu to open the Show Ink and Paper Consumed dialog box.
This lists the total amounts of ink and paper consumed by the printer so far.
You can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button.
Note
• Up to 7 types of media are listed in order of the amount consumed. The total consumption for other me-
dia types is shown as Other.
4

406

Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed iPF8300


Windows Software > Digital Photo Front-Access >

Digital Photo Front-Access


Digital Photo Front-Access ........................................................................................................................ 407

Digital Photo Front-Access


Digital Photo Front-Access is an application that links photos from Canon digital cameras and other image files on your
computer with various other applications.

• Simply select an image and click the icon of the application you want to start to launch the application.
• You can also print from Digital Photo Front-Access. In short, Digital Photo Front-Access can help you manage
images in many ways from editing to printing as an effective way to work with other applications.
• Digital Photo Front-Access also enables image retouching. For automatic retouching, select an image for retouch-
ing and click Image Adjustment.
• Because this application automates the workflow from retouching to display for all of your images, it can save time
and work in retouching.
Note
• For details, refer to the Digital Photo Front-Access help.

407

iPF8300 Digital Photo Front-Access


Windows Software > Device Setup Utility >

Device Setup Utility


imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ....................................................................................................... 408
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ....................................................................................... 408
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ................................................ 408

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility


imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and your computer by
completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup
Utility to complete the network settings initially.

4
• Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this list, select
the printer (specifically, the printer's MAC address) that you want to set up, and then configure the basic settings
from your computer, such as the printer's IP address and the network frame type.
• You can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication between your
computer and these printers is possible.
Note
• We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using imagePROG-
RAF Device Setup Utility.
• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility


Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:
Important
• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows
7, you must log on with administrative rights equivalent to the Administrator account.

1. Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.


408 2. On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.
3. Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility


On a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to con-
figure the printer's IP address. This topic describes how to configure the IP address using imagePROGRAF Device Set-
up Utility.

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility iPF8300


Windows Software > Device Setup Utility >

Important
• To configure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as Administrator
account. We recommend that your network administrator configure the network settings.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see "Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility." →P.408

When specifying an IPv4 IP address

1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to configure. 4


3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
4. Select the IPv4 tab.

409

iPF8300 Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility


Windows Software > Device Setup Utility >

5. In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.


6. Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
7. Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed.
8. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Note
• To configure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select DHCP,
BOOTP, or RARP.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.

When specifying an IPv6 IP address

4 1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to configure.


3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

410

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility iPF8300


Windows Software > Device Setup Utility >

4. Select the IPv6 tab.

5. In IPv6, select On.


6. When there is an IPv6-compatible router in the network environment, select On in Stateless Address.
Additionally, when there is an DHCPv6-compatible server in the network environment, select On in DHCPv6.
Note
• When there is no IPv6-compatible router or DHCPv6-compatible server, select On in Manual
and enter the IPv6 Address and Prefix Length.
411
7. Click Set.
8. Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed.
9. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

iPF8300 Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Media Configuration Tool


The Features of Media Configuration Tool ................................................................................................ 412
Operating Environment ............................................................................................................................. 413
Installation Procedures .............................................................................................................................. 413
Starting the Media Configuration Tool ....................................................................................................... 416
Media Configuration Tool Main Window .................................................................................................... 417
Editing Media Type Information ................................................................................................................. 418
Adding Media Types ............................................................................................................................. 418
Changing Media Names ........................................................................................................................ 421
Deleting Media Types You Have Added ............................................................................................... 423
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide .......................................................................................... 424
Changing the Display Order of Media Types ........................................................................................ 426
Updating Media Types .............................................................................................................................. 427
Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper/Feed Confirmed Paper ............................................................. 430
Compatible Paper ................................................................................................................................. 431
4 Add Custom Paper ................................................................................................................................ 431
Delete Custom Paper ............................................................................................................................ 440
Edit Custom Paper ................................................................................................................................ 441
Export Custom Media Information ......................................................................................................... 442
Import Custom Media Information ......................................................................................................... 443
Warnings ............................................................................................................................................... 445

The Features of Media Configuration Tool


The Media Configuration Tool offers the following features.
• Enables information about additional media (types of paper) supported by the printer to be added to the printer
control panel and to the printer driver, through the use of relevant media information files.
• You can rearrange lists of the types of paper on the printer control panel and in printer driver dialog boxes and
rename them, in addition to other functions.
• You can add custom paper (paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper) to the printer
control panel and printer driver.
Important
• Normally, the Media Configuration Tool is installed and the media information is configured when you
install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM. Use this software if you want to add new
media information or edit existing media information.
• Administration of paper information using the Media Configuration Tool should be performed by the
printer administrator.
412 • Canon offers absolutely no guarantees regarding the print quality or paper feed properties of customer
paper (paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon output confirmed paper).
• The paper feed properties cannot be guaranteed if Add Custom Paper is used on Canon genuine paper
in the Media Configuration Tool.
• The print quality and paper feed properties cannot be guaranteed if Add Custom Paper is used on Can-
on feed confirmed paper in the Media Configuration Tool. Furthermore, Canon does not guarantee the
print quality of Canon feed confirmed paper.

Note
• Canon genuine paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are detailed in the Paper Reference Guide. Any
other paper is called custom paper.

The Features of Media Configuration Tool iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Operating Environment
You can use Media Configuration Tool in the following environments.
• Compatible Operating System
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7
• Software that requires installation
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver

Installation Procedures
The Media Configuration Tool installation screen appears when you start the installation of a new version of the Media
Configuration Tool. The installation procedure started from this screen is described below.
Important
• If the printer driver is installed from the User Software CD-ROM, the Media Configuration Tool is also
installed and the media information is also configured. Therefore, the following procedure does not nor-
mally need to be performed. To install the Media Configuration Tool without using the User Software
CD-ROM, such as when you have downloaded a new version of the Media Configuration Tool from the
4
Canon website, use the following procedure.
• You must be logged in as Administrator when installing software in Windows.

1. Start the Media Configuration Tool installer.


Click the Next button.

413

iPF8300 Operating Environment


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

2. The next screen presents selections for the country or area where the printer is used.
Select a country or territory then click the Next button.

3. The License Agreement is displayed.


Select I accept the terms of the license agreement and click the Next button.

414

Installation Procedures iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

4. The Choose Destination Location screen appears.


Select the destination folder then click the Next button.

5. The Ready to Install the Program screen appears.


Click the Install button.

415

iPF8300 Installation Procedures


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

6. All the required files are copied to your computer and InstallShield Wizard Complete screen appears.
Click the Finish button.

This completes the installation of Media Configuration Tool.

Starting the Media Configuration Tool


Follow the procedure below to start Media Configuration Tool.
From the start menu go to Programs > iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool > iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool.
Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed.

416

Starting the Media Configuration Tool iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Media Configuration Tool Main Window


The explanation below is on the Media Configuration Tool main window.

Note
• For the step to open the Media Configuration Tool main window, see Starting the Media Configuration
Tool →P.416 .

Add Genuine Paper button


When this button is clicked, the Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed, which allows you to add media information
files released by Canon to the printer control panel and printer driver. You can also change names, toggle between dis-
playing and hiding, and delete added media types.
You can also change the display order of Canon genuine paper and custom paper.
Refer to Editing Media Type Information →P.418 for details on Add Genuine Paper.

Add Custom Paper button


When this button is clicked, the Add Custom Paper dialog box is displayed, which allows you to added custom paper
(paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper) to the printer control panel and printer driver.
Refer to Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper/Feed Confirmed Paper →P.430 for details on Add Custom
Paper.

Link to Support Information button


Opens imagePROGRAF Support Information. You can check information such as the latest information for the 417
product and software version upgrade information.

Link to User Manual Button


Click this button to display the printer user manual. This function requires that the user manual be installed on your
computer.

iPF8300 Media Configuration Tool Main Window


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Editing Media Type Information


Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media Configuration Tool main window to display the Edit Media Types
dialog box.

This dialog box presents functions for the following tasks.


• Adding Media Types →P.418

• Changing Media Names →P.421

• Deleting Media Types You Have Added →P.423

• Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide →P.424

• Changing the Display Order of Media Types →P.426

Important
• When you update the media type information, perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using
that printer.
• Adding, deleting, toggling display/non-display, and changing the paper name of a media type can only be
performed for Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper. Refer to "Using Paper Other Than Gen-
uine Paper/Feed Confirmed Paper →P.430 " for details on adding, editing, and deleting custom pa-
per. Custom paper displays Custom as the Status in the Media Type list.
• To add media types, download the media information file (.amf file) in advance from the Canon website.

Note
• It may not be possible to deleting, showing/hiding, and changing the display order under some condi-
418
tions.

Adding Media Types


Media information files (.amf files) released by Canon are registered in the printer control panel and printer driver.
Important
• Do not perform printing on the target printer while adding the media types.

Editing Media Type Information iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

1. Open the Edit Media Types dialog box, and then click the Add button.

2. The Add Media Type dialog box displays.


Click the Browse button.

419

iPF8300 Adding Media Types


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

3. The Browse for Folder dialog box opens.


Select the folder that contains the media information files (.amf files), and then click the OK button.

4. The names of media information files in the folder you selected in the Browse for Folder dialog box are dis-
played under Media Information File in the Add Media Type dialog box. Select the check boxes of paper to
add and click the OK button.

420
Important
• If Master Media Information File is displayed as the Type of the Media Information File, the
media type display order and media type display/non-display settings are initialized. Reconfigure
these after added the master media information file.

5. Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed.

Adding Media Types iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

6. In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

The Update Media Types wizard is started at this point. For details on the procedure to update paper informa-
tion using the Update Media Types wizard, see "Updating Media Types." →P.427
Important
• Be sure to click the Update button. If you do not, your changes will not be applied to the printer
and printer driver.

Changing Media Names

1. Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.

421

iPF8300 Changing Media Names


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

2. In the Media Type list, select the name to change.


Click the Rename button.

3. The Rename Media dialog box is displayed.


Edit the names in Name in Printer Driver and Name on Control Panel and click the OK button.

Note
• To restore the original names, click the Restore button.

4. In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

422

Changing Media Names iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

The Update Media Types wizard is started at this point. For details on the procedure to update paper informa-
tion using the Update Media Types wizard, see "Updating Media Types." →P.427
Important
• Be sure to click the Update button. If you do not, your changes will not be applied to the printer
and printer driver.

Deleting Media Types You Have Added

1. Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.

2. In the Media Type list, select the name of the media to delete.
Click the Delete button.

423

Note
• Only paper for which Status in the Media Type is Add can be deleted.

iPF8300 Deleting Media Types You Have Added


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

3. In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

The Update Media Types wizard is started at this point. For details on the procedure to update paper informa-
tion using the Update Media Types wizard, see "Updating Media Types." →P.427
Important
• Be sure to click the Update button. If you do not, your changes will not be applied to the printer
and printer driver.

Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide

1. Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.

424

Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

2. In the Media Type list, select the name of the media to switch off or on for display.
Click the Show/Hide button.
The selected paper is alternately shown or hidden.

Note
• The names of media switched for non-display appear grayed out in the Media Type list.
• Each time you click the Show/Hide button, the display mode cycles from showing both the print-
er driver and printer panel, to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel, and then to showing
only the printer panel.

3. In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

425

The Update Media Types wizard is started at this point. For details on the procedure to update paper informa-
tion using the Update Media Types wizard, see "Updating Media Types." →P.427
Important
• Be sure to click the Update button. If you do not, your changes will not be applied to the printer
and printer driver.

iPF8300 Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Changing the Display Order of Media Types

1. Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.

2. Select the paper in the Media Type list for which to change the display order, and then click the buttons to
move the item ( or ).
The selected item moves one line up or down for every button click.

426

Changing the Display Order of Media Types iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

3. In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

The Update Media Types wizard is started at this point. For details on the procedure to update paper informa-
tion using the Update Media Types wizard, see "Updating Media Types." →P.427
Important
• Be sure to click the Update button. If you do not, your changes will not be applied to the printer
and printer driver.

Updating Media Types


Clicking the Update button on the Edit Media Types dialog box opens the Update Media Types wizard. You can use
this wizard to apply new information about print media in the printer and in the printer driver.
The procedures for updating the media information with the Update Media Types wizard are as follows.
Important
• When you update the media type information, perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using
that printer.

427

iPF8300 Updating Media Types


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

1. Confirm the printer, where media type information is to be updated, to be displayed in Printer in the Update
Media Types - Select Printer dialog box, and then click the Next button.

Note
• If the printer driver is not installed, the following dialog box is displayed. Select how the printer
to update is connected.

2. Communication with the printer starts and the following dialog box is displayed.

428 Important
• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the print-
er.
• When the program cannot communicate with the printer, the following warning message is dis-
played.

Updating Media Types iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

3. When the program has finished communicating with the printer, the screen moves to display Update Media
Types - Confirm Update. Confirm the information received from the printer.
To update click the Execute button.

Important
• When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media in-
formation file is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click
the Cancel button.

4. Communication with the printer starts and the following dialog box is displayed.

Important
• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the print-
er.
• When the program cannot communicate with the printer, the following warning message is dis-
played.

429

iPF8300 Updating Media Types


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

5. Click the OK button.

Note
• To apply the same updates to other printers of the same model, click the Add Genuine Paper
button in the main window to open the Edit Media Types dialog box and then click the Update
button. Select the printer that you want to update in Step 1, and update the media information by
following the Update Media Types wizard.

Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper/Feed Confirmed Paper


4 When the Add Custom Paper button is clicked in the Media Configuration Tool main window, the Add Custom Pa-
per dialog box is displayed.
Adding custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver is performed from this screen.
Note
• Custom paper is paper other than Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper (paper that is detailed
in the Paper Reference Guide).

430
The following operations can be performed from this screen.
• Add Custom Paper →P.431

• Edit Custom Paper →P.441

• Delete Custom Paper →P.440

• Export Custom Media Information →P.442

• Import Custom Media Information →P.443

Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper/Feed Confirmed Paper iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Important
• When adding, editing, or deleting custom paper, make the same changes on all of the other PCs that use
the target printer. The changes can be made easily by creating a Custom Media Information File (.am1
file) using the custom paper export function and importing the file on the other PCs.
• When using custom paper in another printer, always add the custom paper to that printer before use.
• Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper cannot be changed from this dialog box. Refer to "Edit-
ing Media Type Information →P.418 ".
• Changing the display order of media types displayed in the printer control panel and printer driver is per-
formed from the Edit Media Types dialog box regardless of whether it is Canon genuine paper or cus-
tom paper. Refer to "Editing Media Type Information →P.418 ".

Compatible Paper

Paper specifications
Refer to "Specifications" and "Paper" for specifications such as thickness and size of paper that can be added as custom
paper (See "Specifications.") →P.881
4
Notes on the operating environment
In low humidity environments (below 40%), your printer may develop the following problems.
• Paper becomes curled or wrinkled.
• Paper and the printhead are more likely to touch each other, resulting in a scratched print surface or damaged print-
head.
• The cut printed matter sticks to the printer and will not fall down (film media).
• Paper sticks to the printer, making its transfer impossible and preventing its normal ejection (film media).
• Uneven printing (film media)

In high humidity environments (over 60%), your printer may develop the following problems.
• Printed matter will not dry.
• Wavy paper surface
• Cut edges are ragged (fabric media).
• Margins remain due to borderless printing.
Important
• Canon offers absolutely no guarantees regarding the print quality or paper feed properties of customer
paper (paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper).

431
Add Custom Paper
In order to add new custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver, first select the media type to use as the
basis from among the Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper.. Add this as custom paper after making various
changes to the standard paper as necessary.
Important
• Do not execute printing on the target printer while adding custom paper.
• When adding custom paper, check the specifications of paper that can be added using "Compatible Pa-
per →P.431 ".
• Custom paper added using the add custom paper function can only be used by the printer driver. It can-
not be used by other software.

iPF8300 Compatible Paper


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

1. Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box and click the Add button.

2. Check that the printer on which you are updating the media information is displayed in Printer in the Update
Media Types - Select Printer dialog box and click the Next button.

432
3. The Step 1: Select the standard paper dialog box is displayed. In Paper Category, select the category of me-
dia type to use as the basis of the custom paper you are adding.
Important
• Select the category that you think is the closest to the custom paper you are adding.

Add Custom Paper iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

4
4. The media type names of the Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper within the selected category are
shown in Media Type Name. Select the media type to use as the basis of the custom paper, and click the Next
button.
Note
• If you do not know which media type to use as the basis of the custom paper, click the Assist
button to open the Media Type Selection Assistance dialog box, and then set either the Weight
(grammage) or the Thickness. The Media Configuration Tool automatically selects the appropri-
ate paper from the selected paper category. Alternatively, select the media type called General
from among the displayed Media Type Name.
• Depending on the selected category, there might not be a media type called General.
• Depending on the selected category, the Assist button may be disabled.

5. The Step 2: Set the custom paper name dialog box is displayed.
Enter an arbitrary name to display in the printer control panel and printer driver, and then click the Next button.

433

iPF8300 Add Custom Paper


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Note
• Paper Name (English) is used in keeping track of the amount of roll paper left, in status print,
etc.

6. Load the custom paper in the printer and then click the OK button.

Important
• Do not load paper that is curled or that has already been printed on.

7. The Step 3: Paper Source Settings dialog box is displayed. Select the paper source where the custom paper is
loaded and then click the OK button.
4

8. The Step 4: Paper feed adjustment dialog box is displayed. Click the Execute button to execute paper feed
adjustment.
The adjustment pattern is printed, and the paper feed is automatically adjusted based on the printing result.
Once the paper feed adjustment is complete, click the Next button.

434

Important
• Check that there is no paper left on the ejection guide.
• If Paper Feed Adjustment is not executed, horizontal stripes with different color tones may ap-
pear in the printed material. Paper feed adjustment does not need to be executed more than once.
Execute paper feed adjustment only once each time you add a custom paper.

Add Custom Paper iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

9. The Roll Paper Settings dialog box is displayed.


Note
• If a paper source other than Roll Paper is selected in the Step 3: Paper Source Settings dialog
box, this screen is not displayed.

Configure the following settings as necessary, and then click the Next button.

Setting Details
Automatic Cutting Settings Configures the method for cutting roll paper when it is ejected after printing.
• Automatic Cut :Roll paper is automatically cut by the cutter unit.
• Eject Cut :When the Cut key is pressed on the printer control panel, the roll
paper is cut by the cutter unit. Select this if you do not want the printed mate-
rial to drop immediately after printing, such as to wait for the ink to dry.
• User Cut :Cutting is not performed by the cutter unit. Cut the roll paper us-
ing scissors after each sheet. Select this for paper that cannot be cut by the
cutter unit.
Drying Time Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed.
• Off :Ejects immediately after printing finishes.
• 30 sec./1 min./3 min./5 min./10 min./30 min./60 min. :Ejects after the
specified time has elapsed after printing finishes.
Borderless Printing Configures whether or not to permit borderless printing.
435
• Permit : Borderless printing is permitted.
• Deny : Borderless printing is denied.

iPF8300 Add Custom Paper


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Important
• Depending on the paper, there are types that cannot be cut by the cutter unit, and types that speed
deterioration of the blade and cause damage to the cutter. For thick paper, hard paper, etc. do not
use the cutter unit, and instead cut the roll paper using scissors, etc. after printing. In this case,
select User Cut as the Automatic Cutting Settings.
• If borderless printing is performed on paper where the ink drying is poor, the cutter unit may
leave scratches where it touches the printed surface, or may not cut correctly. In this kind of sit-
uation, configure the amount of time to wait for the ink to dry after printing using Drying Time.
Alternatively, if the paper cannot be cut well by the cutter, set the Automatic Cutting Settings to
User Cut and cut the roll paper using scissors, etc.
• Paper where borderless printing can be performed is limited by the media type and roll paper
width. Refer to "Compatible Paper →P.431 ".
• For custom paper where there is a need to set the Automatic Cutting Settings to User Cut, set
the Borderless Printing to Deny.

10. The Step 5: Configure the amount of ink used dialog box is displayed.
The upper limit on the amount of ink used to print to the custom paper is set on this screen by selecting from
4 among several levels.
First, click the Test Print button to perform a test print of each level.

Important
• If Newsprint for Proofing was selected as the standard paper for the custom paper, you cannot
perform the test print or configure the maximum ink usage.
436

Add Custom Paper iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

11. The Test Print Settings dialog box is displayed.


Select the print priority and print quality of the test print using Print Priority and Print Quality.
Set the level to test print using Maximum ink usage and the image to use using Image used in test print, and
then click the Start Print button.

12. Determine and set the ink level that is thought to give the best visual test print results with no bleeding or scrap-
ing of ink.

437

Note
• Select the optimal ink level by referring to the help.
• If you cannot obtain sufficiently high quality printing no matter which maximum ink usage level
you select, use the Step 1: Select the standard paper dialog box to change the paper that is the
basis of the custom paper to another paper.

iPF8300 Add Custom Paper


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Important
• Because this settings imposes an upper limit on the amount of ink used during printing, the print-
ing result might not change even if the level is changed depending on the image.
• The color tone cannot be configured using the Media Configuration Tool. Although the color
tone may change when the maximum ink usage is changed, at this point you should select the
optimal level by only focusing on bleeding and scraping of ink. If the color tone needs to be ad-
justed, provide an ICC color profile that matches the paper you are using, and select that ICC
color profile in your software.
• Depending on the maximum ink usage setting, some of the print qualities in the printer driver
may become unselectable.

13. Configure Head Height and Vacuum Strength as required and click the Next button.
Usually, these do not need to be set.

Important
• If you set the Head Height lower than the automatically set height in parentheses ( ), check that
the printhead does not rub against the paper. (If the printhead rubs against the paper, there will be
scratches in the printing results.) If the printhead rubs against the paper, this can cause damage to
the printhead.
• If you change the Vacuum Strength, check that the printhead is not rubbing against the paper. (If
the printhead rubs against the paper, there will be scratches in the printing results.) If the print-
head rubs against the paper, this can cause damage to the printhead.
• For details on the Head Height and Vacuum Strength, refer to the help.
438

Add Custom Paper iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

14. The Step 6: Confirm the settings dialog box is displayed.


Configure the settings of the custom paper, and then click the Next button.

15. The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.


Confirm the updates and then click the Execute button.

439
The custom paper is added to the control panel of the printer and to the printer driver of the PC you are using.
Important
• If you have added custom paper with the POP Board / Cardboard category as the Standard Pa-
per, remove the loaded custom paper from the printer.

Note
• When the custom paper is correctly added to the printer driver, the name of the added custom
paper is displayed in the Edit Media Types dialog box that is opened by Add Genuine Paper in
the Media Configuration Tool window.

iPF8300 Add Custom Paper


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Delete Custom Paper


You can delete custom paper that you have already added from printer control panel and from the printer driver of the
PC you are using.

1. Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box.


2. Select the paper you want to delete from the Added Custom Paper list and then click the Delete button.

3. Select the custom paper you want to delete, and then click the Next button.

440

Delete Custom Paper iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

4. The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.


Confirm the updates and then click the Execute button.

The custom paper is deleted from the control panel of the printer and from the printer driver of the PC you are
using.

Edit Custom Paper


You can change the settings of custom paper you have already added.

1. Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box.


2. Select the paper you want to edit from the Added Custom Paper list and then click the Edit button.

441

iPF8300 Edit Custom Paper


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

3. The Update Media Types - Select Printer dialog box is displayed.


Follow the on-screen directions and change the settings as required.
Note
• Refer to Steps 5 to 15 of the "Add Custom Paper →P.431 " for details on how to configure
each setting.

Export Custom Media Information


You can export to file and save media information about custom paper that you have added.
The saved Custom Media Information File can be used by importing it into another printer or PC. Refer to "Import
Custom Media Information →P.443 " for details on "importing custom media information".

1. Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box.


2. Select the paper you want to export to media information file from the Added Custom Paper list and then click
4 the Export button.

442

Export Custom Media Information iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

3. Specify the location to save the Custom Media Information File.

A Custom Media Information File (.am1 file) is saved.

Import Custom Media Information


You can import a Custom Media Information File that has been saved in a folder, and add the file to the printer control
panel and to the printer driver of the PC you are using.

1. Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box.


2. Click the Import button.

443

iPF8300 Import Custom Media Information


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

3. Select the printer to add the custom paper to.

Note
• Double-click Custom Media Information File to start the Media Configuration Tool and display
this screen.

4. Select the Custom Media Information File (.am1 file) to import.

444

Import Custom Media Information iPF8300


Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

5. The Confirm Update dialog box opens.


Click the Execute button.

The custom paper is added to the control panel of the printer and to the printer driver of the PC you are using.
Note
• When the custom paper is correctly added to the printer driver, the name of the added custom
paper is displayed in the Edit Media Types dialog box that is opened by Add Genuine Paper in
the Media Configuration Tool window.

Warnings
Take note of the following warnings when added custom paper other than Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed
paper to the printer driver and the printer itself.

About the Cutter


• Depending on the paper, there are types that cannot be cut by the cutter unit, and types that speed deterioration of
the blade and cause damage to the cutter. For thick paper, hard paper, etc. do not use the cutter unit, and instead cut
the roll paper using scissors, etc. after printing. In this case, select User Cut as the Automatic Cutting Settings in
the Roll Paper Settings dialog box.
Note
• If the cutter is damaged, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
445
• Refer to "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls" for details on the methods for cutting roll paper. (See
"Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") →P.744

About the Printhead


• If the printhead rubs against the paper during printing, this may cause damage to the printhead. If the printhead is
rubbing against the paper, configure the Vacuum Strength in the Step 5: Configure the amount of ink used
dialog box as follows.
• For paper-based media such as Heavyweight Coated Paper: Set to Strong or Strongest
• For film-based media such as CAD Tracing Paper: Set to Standard, Strong, or Strongest
• For thin paper of thickness 0.1mm or less: Set to Weakest

iPF8300 Warnings
Windows Software > Media Configuration Tool >

Note
• If the printhead still rubs even after changing the Vacuum Strength, set the Head Height to be higher in
the Step 5: Configure the amount of ink used dialog box.
• Refer to "Paper rubs against the Printhead" for details on how to handle the printhead rubbing against the
paper. (See "Paper rubs against the printhead.") →P.993

About Borderless Printing


• When performing borderless printing on paper where the ink does not dry well, the cutter unit may leave scratches
where it touches the printed surface, or may not cut correctly. In this kind of situation, configure the amount of
time to wait for the ink to dry after printing using Drying Time in the Roll Paper Settings dialog box.
Alternatively, if the paper cannot be cut well by the cutter, set the Automatic Cutting Settings to User Cut in the
Roll Paper Settings dialog box, and cut the roll paper using scissors, etc.

About the Print Quality


• If the edges of images are blurry, set the Vacuum Strength to be weaker in the Step 5: Configure the amount of
ink used dialog box.
4 • If lines are warped or scratched, set the Head Height to be lower in the Step 5: Configure the amount of ink
used dialog box.
• If the amount of ink used is too much, wrinkles may appear and the ink may bleed in the printed material. Further-
more, if the amount of ink used is too little, color production may be poor and lines may become scratched. In this
kind of situation, change the amount of ink used in the Step 5: Configure the amount of ink used dialog box.
• If horizontal bands with different color tone appear in the printed material, execute Paper Feed Adjustment in the
Step 4: Paper feed adjustment dialog box. If you have already executed Paper Feed Adjustment, execute Adj.
Fine Feed from the printer control panel and fine tune the amount of paper feed.
Note
• Refer to "Fine tuning the amount of paper feed (paper feed fine adjustment)" for details on Adj.
Fine Feed. (See "Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount (Adj. Fine Feed).") →P.797
• If horizontal bands appear even after executing Adj. Fine Feed, refer to "Banding in different col-
ors occurs" in "Troubleshooting". (See "Banding in different colors occurs.") →P.996

• If you cannot obtain sufficiently high print quality, change the maximum ink usage, or change the media type used
as the basis for the custom paper in the Step 1: Select the standard paper dialog box.
• If there is no luster in printed material, set the paper used as the basis for the custom paper to a paper that uses
photo ink as the Black ink.
The types of Black ink used are displayed on the right side of each media type in the Step 1: Select the standard
paper dialog box.
Note
• Refer to "Problems with the printing quality" for details on problems with printing quality. (Refer to
"Problems with the printing quality →P.992 ")
446
About the Color Tone
• The color tone cannot be configured using the Media Configuration Tool. If the color tone needs to be adjusted,
provide an ICC color profile that matches the paper you are using, and select that ICC color profile in your soft-
ware.
• Custom paper cannot be used with the ambient light adjustment function or Monitor Matching in Color-Matching
Method.

Warnings iPF8300
Mac OS X Software >

Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver 448

Preview 478

Free Layout 506

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 539

Print Plug-In for Photoshop/Digital Photo Professional 561

Printmonitor 625

Media Configuration Tool 628

447

iPF8300
Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Printer Driver
Printer Driver Settings .............................................................................................................................. 448
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ...................................................................................................... 450
Confirming Print Settings .......................................................................................................................... 452
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ................................................................................... 453
Using Favorites ........................................................................................................................................ 454
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications ...................................................................... 454
Main Pane ................................................................................................................................................ 455
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 459
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 460
View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application ........................................................................... 461
Matching pane ....................................................................................................................................... 462
Ambient Light Adjust dialog box ............................................................................................................ 465
Light Source Check Tool ....................................................................................................................... 467
Color Settings Pane: Color ................................................................................................................... 468
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color ..................................................................................................... 469
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome ...................................................................................................... 470
5 Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome ........................................................................................ 471
Gray Adjustment Pane ......................................................................................................................... 472
Page Setup Pane ..................................................................................................................................... 473
Utility Pane ............................................................................................................................................... 475
Additional Settings Pane .......................................................................................................................... 476
Support Pane ........................................................................................................................................... 477

Printer Driver Settings


For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X printer driver, refer to the following topics.
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications →P.454

448

Printer Driver Settings iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

For information on the Mac OS X printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
• Main Pane →P.455
You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose Easy
Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more
detailed settings as desired.
• Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box →P.460

• View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application →P.461

• Color Settings Pane: Color →P.468

• Object Adjustment dialog box: Color →P.469

• Matching pane →P.462

• Ambient Light Adjust dialog box →P.465


• Light Source Check Tool →P.467

• Color Settings Pane: Monochrome →P.470 449


• Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome →P.471

• Gray Adjustment Pane →P.472

• Page Setup Pane →P.473


You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the
paper size and source, and automatic cutting.
• Utility Pane →P.475
You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
• Additional Settings Pane →P.476
You can specify settings for how print jobs are sent to the printer.
• Support Pane →P.477

iPF8300 Printer Driver Settings


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

You can view support information and the user's manual.

With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications on a sin-
gle page before printing. For details, see Free Layout →P.506 .
With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or size settings
while viewing a preview screen. For details, see Preview →P.478 .
With the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy feature, you can automatically enlarge and print scanned originals
from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy →P.539 .

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver


If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.


Note
• The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are configured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed
when you select Print from the application software menu.

450

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.


3. Choose the original size in the F Paper Size list.
4. If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

5. Access the Main pane.

5
6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
7. Access the Page Setup pane.

451

8. In the A Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.


9. If you have selected Cut Sheet in A Paper Source, make sure the size as selected in Page Setup is displayed in
C Page Size. If you have selected roll paper in A Paper Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is dis-
played in B Roll Width.

Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer In-
formation on the Main pane to update the printer information.

iPF8300 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

5 Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings →P.448 "

Confirming Print Settings


There are two ways to confirm what printing conditions have been specified, as follows.
• Checking a preview of the settings
• Checking a print preview

Checking a preview of the settings


A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, Utility, and Additional Settings
panes.By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can confirm current settings for the page size, ori-
entation, paper source, and so on.

452

Confirming Print Settings iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Display Area Information Displayed

Pane displayed when the H Im- On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the paper size, orien-
ages tab is clicked tation, layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other settings infor-
mation.
Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement
or reduction is displayed.
Pane displayed when the I Size Paper size details are indicated numerically.
tab is clicked
Pane with printer and paper il- Illustrations indicate the paper source, orientation, borderless printing selection,
lustrations and other settings information.

Note
• To confirm the Print Target specified in Easy Settings, click G View set. on the Main pane to display
the View settings dialog box.

Checking a print preview


You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
Confirming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see "Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing →P.168 " 5

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing


This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview function.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.


2. Access the Main pane.

453

3. Select the O Print Preview check box.


4. Click M Print.

iPF8300 Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

5. The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.

5
6. Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.
7. Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to Preview →P.478 .

Using Favorites
You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.
Note
• In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a
standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications

454 1. In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
Note
• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

Using Favorites iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

2. Select the printer in the Printer list.

3. Click Print to start printing.


As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for
various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.

455

Main Pane
The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.
Note
• On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or
switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

iPF8300 Main Pane


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Common Items

5
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.(See "Types of Pa-
per →P.719 ")

B Get Information
Displays Paper Information on Printer. You can update the printer driver settings for the feed source, media type, and
roll width by selecting the feed source.
• Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box →P.459

C Set
Displays Paper Detailed Settings. You can configure the printing settings to match the type of media, such as the ink
drying time.
• Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box →P.460

O Print Preview
If you turn this on, imagePROGRAF Preview starts before printing.
This allows you to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.
456
Important
• This cannot be selected if Free Layout is enabled in the Page Setup panel.

• Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing →P.168

L Printer
Displays Printer. You can display printer information such as the remaining ink levels.

Main Pane iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Configuration using Easy Settings

5
E Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
• Printing Photos and Images →P.17

• Printing Office Documents →P.33

F Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.

G View set.
Click to display the View settings dialog box, which enables you to confirm the settings for the selected item from the
E Print Target list or change the order of items listed in E Print Target.
• View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application →P.461

457

iPF8300 Main Pane


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Configuration using Advanced Settings

5
E Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
• Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing →P.49

F Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
• Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing →P.49

N High-Precision Photographs
Print with improved gradation and uniformity, particularly for high-precision photographs. However, this takes more
time than regular printing.
Note
• N High-Precision Photographs may not be selected depending on the A Media Type you select.
• N High-Precision Photographs and K High-Precision Text and Fine Lines cannot be checked at the
same time.
• To improve print quality, you may need to adjust the position of the printhead. (See "Enhancing Print-
ing Quality →P.784 ")
458

G Input Bit Depth


Choose the levels of gradation in print data, either 8-bit or 16-bit. Optimal results when printing data with rich grada-
tion are possible by choosing 16-bit. For example, this option is particularly suited to printing images created after
specifying 16 bits per channel in Photoshop.
(Mac OS X 10.4 or later)

R Fast Graphic Process


Select this option to print faster than usual, when possible.

Main Pane iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

H Color Mode
Choose the color mode.
• Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing →P.49

I Set
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.
• Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver →P.40

J Unidirectional Printing
Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality. However, the printing
speed becomes slower.

Q Thicken Fine Lines


Activate this option to print fine lines more distinctly.

K High-Precision Text and Fine Lines


Print increasing ink impact accuracy, particularly for sharper text and fine lines. However, this takes more time than 5
regular printing.
Note
• K High-Precision Text and Fine Lines may not be selected depending on the A Media Type you se-
lect.
• To improve print quality, you may need to adjust the position of the printhead. (See "Enhancing Print-
ing Quality →P.784 ")

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box


On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and configure
printer driver media type setting.

459

iPF8300 Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Note
• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main pane, click Get Information by
Media Type.(See "Main Pane →P.455 ")

A Paper Source
Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer, as well as the type of paper loaded. To update the media type setting
in the printer driver, select the desired Paper Source option and click OK.

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box


The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.

Note
• To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click Set by Media Type.(See
"Main Pane →P.455 ")

A Media Type
460
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.(See "Types of Pa-
per →P.719 ")

B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying Time setting is only valid for rolls.
• (See "Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls →P.741 ")

C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper, as needed.

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.

E Roll Paper Margin for Safety


You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held
firmly against the Platen.

F Near End Margin


Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.

G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic
cutting is used.

H Automatic Cutting
You can activate or deactivate automatic cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, specify Printer De-
fault, None, or Print Cut Guideline.
5
I Calibration Value
You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the printer to image processing.

J Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with
the left and right sides inverted.

View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application


In the View settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.

461

iPF8300 View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Note
• To display the View settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click View settings by Print Target.(See
"Main Pane →P.455 ")

A Print Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).

B Name
Identifies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

C Details
Here, you can confirm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list.

Matching pane
On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on
various devices.
5
Important
• If No color correction is selected under Color Mode, the Matching pane is not displayed.

Note
• To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings in Color Mode in Advanced
Settings, and then click the Matching tab. (Refer to "Main Pane →P.455 ")

Driver Matching Mode (Using Mac OS X 10.3.9)

462

A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

Matching pane iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

B Matching Method
Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various B Matching Method options are
available depending on your selection in A Matching Mode.

C Color Space
Select the applicable color space as desired.

Driver Matching Mode (Using Mac OS X 10.4 or later)


The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the A Matching Mode list.

A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
Normally, select Driver Matching Mode. For color matching based on ICC profiles, select ICC Matching Mode de-
pending on your color matching system.

B Matching Method
Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various B Matching Method options are
available depending on your selection in A Matching Mode.
463
C Color Space
Select the applicable color space as desired.

D Monitor White Point


Enter the color temperature set on the monitor.
Displayed when the B Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching.

E Use ambient light adjustment


Select this option for adjustment of colors to suit the ambient light in the viewing environment.

iPF8300 Matching pane


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

F Ambient Light Adjust


Click to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box, which enables you to complete settings for printing to match
the ambient light.
• Ambient Light Adjust dialog box →P.465

ICC Matching Mode


The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode, in the A Matching Mode list.

Note
• To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings, and then click the Matching tab.(See "Main Pane →P.455 ")

A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

B Input Profile Settings


You can choose Input Profile.
Various options are available depending on your selected A Matching Mode.
464
C Matching Method
You can choose C Matching Method.
Various options are available depending on your selected A Matching Mode.

D Printer Profile Settings


Specify the printer profile as desired.
Note
• For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver →P.40 "

Matching pane iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Ambient Light Adjust dialog box


The Ambient Light Adjust dialog box is used to select the setting method and to enter and select the information re-
quired for the settings.

When you select By selecting a chart number in Setting Method

A Setting Method
You can choose configuration based on the printed Chart or based on using the i1 colorimeter.

B Print Chart
Click to start the Light Source Check Tool, for printing Chart.
• Light Source Check Tool →P.467

C Chart Number
In Chart, select the number of the pattern with your desired colors.

D Color Temperature
Enter the D Color Temperature measured during monitor calibration. Displayed when the B Matching Method is set
to Monitor Matching on the Matching pane.

E Illuminance
Enter the E Illuminance measured during monitor calibration. Displayed when the B Matching Method is set to 465
Monitor Matching on the Matching pane.

iPF8300 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

When you select By entering values directly in Setting Method

A Setting Method
5 You can choose configuration based on the printed Chart or based on using the i1 colorimeter.

B Lighting Source Type


Select the light source measured using the i1 colorimeter.

D Color Temperature
Enter the D Color Temperature measured using the i1 colorimeter.

E Illuminance
Enter the E Illuminance measured using the i1 colorimeter.
Displayed when the B Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching pane.

Note
• For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver →P.40 "

466

Ambient Light Adjust dialog box iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Light Source Check Tool


The Light Source Check Tool enables you to print Chart.

A Printer Name
The printer name is displayed here.

B Media Type
Select the paper type. For information on the types of paper compatible with Driver Matching Mode, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide.(See "Types of Paper →P.719 ")

C Paper Source
Choose the paper source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in B Media Type in the Main pane.

D Print
Click to print the Chart.

467

iPF8300 Light Source Check Tool


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Color Settings Pane: Color


In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them. However, if
the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.

Color Adjustment pane: color


If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.

Note
• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Ad-
vanced Settings.(See "Main Pane →P.455 ")

A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.

B View Color Pattern


Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

C Apply to Sample
468 Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow


Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.

G Gray Tone
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool (tinged with blue) or Warm (tinged with red).

H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker
than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer
screen).

Color Settings Pane: Color iPF8300


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes
images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

J Saturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Satu-
ration makes colors more subdued.
Note
• For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver →P.40 "

K Object Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color ad-
justment.
• Object Adjustment dialog box: Color →P.469

Object Adjustment dialog box: Color 5


In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an origi-
nal comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment
panel.

A Images 469
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

iPF8300 Object Adjustment dialog box: Color


Mac OS X Software > Printer Driver >

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome


The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.

Color Adjustment pane: Monochrome


On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Note
• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings in Advanced Settings.
(See "Main Pane →P.455 ")

A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.

B View Color Pattern


Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

C Apply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.
470
D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow
Not available.

G Gray Tone
Not available.

H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker
than the